625698
1
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/426
Nächste Seite
Seats and Restraint Systems
........................... 1-1
Front Seats
............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts
............................................. 1-10
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-28
Airbag System
......................................... 1-52
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-68
Features and Controls
..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows
................................................. 2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems
............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-19
Mirrors
.................................................... 2-33
OnStar
®
System
...................................... 2-36
Universal Home Remote System
................ 2-40
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-44
Moonroof
................................................ 2-48
Instrument Panel
............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
.......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-20
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-26
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-45
Audio System(s)
....................................... 3-60
Driving Your Vehicle
....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-28
Service and Appearance Care
.......................... 5-1
Service
..................................................... 5-3
Fuel
......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-49
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-50
Front Axle
............................................... 5-51
Headlamp Aiming
..................................... 5-52
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-52
Windshield Replacement
........................... 5-57
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-57
Tires
...................................................... 5-60
Appearance Care
................................... 5-101
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-110
Electrical System
.................................... 5-111
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-122
Maintenance Schedule
..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule
................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information
.................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects
........................... 7-12
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-14
Index
................................................................ 1
2008 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual M
Saab Automobile, Saab Cars USA, SAAB, Saab 9-7X,
9-7X and the Saab Emblem are registered trademarks
of Saab Automobile, AB.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after
that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Saab Automobile, AB whenever it appears in
this manual.
This manual describes features that may be available in
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.
For example, more than one entertainment system may
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered without
a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15912671 A First Printing
©
2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
ii
Using this Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle to
learn about the vehicle’s features and controls.
Pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let
this happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
You will also find notices in this manual.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
iv
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-2
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ....................1-3
Power Reclining Seatbacks ..............................1-5
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-8
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-23
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-27
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-28
Child Restraints .............................................1-28
Older Children ..............................................1-28
Infants and Young Children ............................1-32
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-35
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-38
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-46
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ..........................1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-49
Airbag System ...............................................1-52
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-55
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-57
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-59
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-59
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? .........................................1-60
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-61
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-66
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-66
Restraint System Check ..................................1-68
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-68
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-69
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are located on the
outboard side of the
seat cushions.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the horizontal control up or down.
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down.
Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
horizontal control up or down.
Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-5.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle has power lumbar on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats.
The seatback lumbar
support can be adjusted
by moving the control
located on the outboard
side of the seat cushions.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-2
Heated Seats
Your vehicle has heated
front seats. The buttons
used to control this feature
are located on the front
door armrests. The engine
must be running for the
heated seat feature
to work.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat and seatback symbol. Press the button to
cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium,
and low and to turn the heated seat off. The indicator
lights above the button will come on to designate the
level of heat selected: three for high, two for medium,
and one for low. The low setting warms the seatback
and seat cushion until the seat temperature is near
body temperature. The medium and high settings heat
the seatback and seat cushion to a slightly higher
temperature. You will be able to feel heat in about
two minutes.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
button will come on to designate that only the seatback
is being heated. Additional presses will cycle through
the heat levels for the seatback only.
The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition
is turned off.
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
The controls for
the memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seating position, both outside
mirror positions, and the adjustable pedals, if equipped.
The settings for these features can be saved for up
to two drivers.
1-3
To store the memory settings, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both of the outside mirrors,
and the adjustable pedals, if equipped, to the
desired position.
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on
page 2-23 for more information.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has been
stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
To recall the memory settings, do one of the following:
Press and release button 1 or 2 while the vehicle
is in PARK (P). A single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
If programmed to do so through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), pressing the unlock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
will recall the preset driver’s memory seat, mirrors,
and adjustable pedals position.
If programmed to do so through the DIC, placing
the key in the ignition will recall the driver’s
memory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals
positions.
See “Seat Recall” under DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 3-53 for more information.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for the easy exit seat function is located on
the driver’s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2.
The easy exit seat button is used to program and recall
the desired driver’s seat position when exiting or
entering the vehicle. The mirrors, power lumbar, recline,
and adjustable pedals, if equipped, positions will not
be stored or recalled when using the easy exit seat
function. The seat position can be saved for up to
two drivers.
1-4
To store the easy exit seat position, do the following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for less than three seconds. The seat will
move to the stored memory position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the easy exit seat button for more
than three seconds. A double chime will sound to
let you know that the position has been stored
for the selected button 1 or 2.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
To recall the easy exit seat position, do one of the
following:
Press the easy exit seat button on the memory
control while the vehicle is in PARK (P). The
seat will move to the stored exit position.
Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), removing the key
from the ignition will move the seat to the exit
position. See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-53 for more information on
activating this feature in the DIC.
If an easy exit seat position has not been stored, the
default position is all the way rearward.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The front seats have
power reclining seatbacks.
Use the vertical power
seat control located on the
outboard side of the
seat to operate them.
To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
1-5
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-6
Head Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press the button, located
on the top of the seatback, and push the head
restraint down.
1-7
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Your vehicle has flip and fold second row seats which
provide additional cargo space.
To flip and fold the seat(s), do the following:
1. Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion
meets the seatback and flip the seat cushion
forward.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
2. Lift the lever, located
on the outboard side
of the seatback,
and fold the seatback
forward.
The head restraint will automatically fold out of the way
as the seatback is folded down.
1-8
To return the seat(s) to the original position, do the
following:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1. Lift the seatback until it locks into the upright
position. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
2. Return the head restraints to the upright position by
reaching behind the seat and pulling it forward until
it locks into place. Push and pull on the head
restraint to make sure that it is locked.
3. Flip the seat cushion back into place.
1-9
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-29.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-10
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
Put someone on it.
1-11
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-12
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones take the forces.
That is why safety belts make such good sense.
1-13
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash even one that is not your fault you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond
your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-32. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the
thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely to slide under the
lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the
lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is over an armrest.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones,
and that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is behind the body.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
1-22
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-28.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
1-23
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-24
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.
And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a
side crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-69.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install the comfort
guide to the shoulder belt:
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-25
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
1-26
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guide. Slide the guide back onto its storage
clip located between the interior body and the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-27
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-28
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no,
try using the rear safety belt comfort guide.
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-23 for more
information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest
on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-23.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-29
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-30
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-31
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not
use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need
to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-32
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
1-33
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
1-34
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-35
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
1-36
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-39 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle even when
no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint. Because there are
different systems, it is important to refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint.
Make sure the child is properly secured,
following the instructions that came with
that restraint.
1-37
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
for additional information.
1-38
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle even when no
child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-39
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-40
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to
be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether,
and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
Second Row
1-41
The labels are located above a flap, at the base of the
seatback, in the rear outside seating positions. The
anchors are located under the flap. In order to get to the
anchors you will need to pull the strap at the center of
the seat where the seat cushion meets the seatback.
This will allow you to fold the seat cushion up and out of
the way. Lift the flap to expose the anchors and then
lower the seat cushion. Be sure the cushion is
locked into place.
The top tether anchors for each rear seating position
are located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Do not use the rear tie-down brackets near the liftgate
for top tethers. Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-38 for additional
information.
1-42
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or
use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
1-43
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Pull the strap at the center of the seat where
the seat cushion meets the seatback. This
will allow you to fold the seat cushion up and
out of the way. Lift the flap to expose the
anchors and then lower the seat cushion.
See Rear Seat Operation on page 1-8
for additional information. Be sure the
cushion is locked into place.
1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-44
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether anchor, if your vehicle
has one. Refer to the child restraint instructions
and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route and tighten the top tether according
to your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions. If your vehicle
has a cargo shade, route the top tether
between the seatback and the cargo shade.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
Fold down the headrest
or head restraint and route
the single tether under
the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts. See
Rear Seat Operation
on page 1-8.
1-45
Fold down the headrest or
head restraint and route
the dual tether around the
headrest or head
restraint. See Rear Seat
Operation on page 1-8.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-39 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-38.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-46
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-47
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly secured
in the center rear seat, although some of them will fit
there. If the center seat position is too narrow for your
child restraint, secure it in a rear outside seat position.
If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position,
follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-46.
1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-38.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-31 for
more information on this, including important safety
information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
for additional information.
1-49
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-39 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the
vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-31.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-50
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
1-51
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
A frontal airbag for the driver.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
1-52
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle and in
the event of a vehicle rollover. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-53
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or
leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a crash. Always wear
your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 1-28 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-32.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-30
for more information.
1-54
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
1-55
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
1-56
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
1-57
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
and right front passenger’s seat. The sensors provide
information that is used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
Your vehicle has roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
on page 1-52. Roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover.
Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts. Both
roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of
the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts
that the vehicle is about to roll over.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity
of the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
1-58
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 1-57 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-59
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at
least partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-59.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using
the controls for those features.
1-60
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-14 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-14.
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible in the rearview
mirror when you start your vehicle.
United States
Canada
1-61
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will
be visible during the system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF,
or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-31.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system
is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system
is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-62
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
The system determines that an infant is present
in a rear-facing infant seat.
The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-31.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-49.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head
Restraints on page 1-7.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
1-63
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on
the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-64
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. This may unintentionally cause the passenger
sensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for some
adult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more on this, including
important safety information.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-66 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-65
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several
places around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and
the service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase
a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 7-13.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, rearview mirror, front sensors,
rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger’s
position, which includes sensors that are part
of the passenger’s seat. The passenger
sensing system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is replaced with non-GM
covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM covers,
upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle.
1-66
Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under
or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with
the operation of the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper deployment of
the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-61.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-79
for additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about the location of the
airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module
and airbag wiring.
1-67
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-29 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-104.
Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-59.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
1-68
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was
being used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-30.
1-69
NOTES
1-70
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation .......................................2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8
Delayed Locking .............................................2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-11
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11
Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................2-12
Windows ........................................................2-13
Power Windows ............................................2-14
Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-16
PASS-Key
®
III ..............................................2-17
PASS-Key
®
III Operation ...............................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-21
Starting the Engine .......................................2-22
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-23
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-23
Active Fuel Management™ .............................2-24
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-25
Parking Brake ..............................................2-28
Shifting Into PARK (P) ...................................2-29
Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-30
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-31
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-31
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-32
Section 2 Features and Controls
2-1
Mirrors ...........................................................2-33
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar
®
and Compass ........................2-33
Outside Power Mirror ....................................2-35
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-35
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-36
OnStar
®
System .............................................2-36
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-40
Universal Home Remote System .....................2-40
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With One Triangular LED) ...........................2-40
Storage Areas ................................................2-44
Glove Box ...................................................2-44
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-45
Overhead Console ........................................2-45
Center Console Storage .................................2-45
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-46
Rear Floor Storage Lid ..................................2-47
Cargo Cover ................................................2-47
Cargo Tie Downs ..........................................2-48
Moonroof .......................................................2-48
Section 2 Features and Controls
2-2
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
This vehicle has double-sided keys that can be used for
the ignition and door lock.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer/retailer
provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a
key code number.
The key code number tells your dealer/retailer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this
number in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you will be
able to have new ones made easily using this number.
Your selling dealer/retailer should also have this number.
2-3
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-4.
The key cannot be removed from the ignition if your
vehicle does not have power. See Ignition Positions on
page 2-20 for additional information.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to your
vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
With this system you can lock and unlock your doors
from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away
using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with
your vehicle. The remote keyless entry transmitter
buttons will not operate when the key is in the ignition.
Q(Lock): Press Qto
lock all the doors. Press
Qagain within three
seconds and the horn
may chirp.
K(Unlock): Press K to automatically unlock the
driver’s door. The parking lamps may flash and
the interior lights will come on. Press
K again and all
remaining doors will unlock.
You can program different feedback settings through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45
L(Panic Alarm): Press Lto sound the horn.
The headlamps and taillamps will also flash for up to
30 seconds. To turn the alarm off, press
Lagain,
or wait 30 seconds, or start the vehicle.
2-5
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. All transmitters need
to be re-coded to match the new transmitter. The lost
transmitter will no longer work after the new transmitters
are re-coded. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB # BATTERY
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB #
BATTERY LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-48.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
1. Remove the screw from the back of the remote
keyless entry cover to open the transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery. Replace with a CR2032
or equivalent battery.
4. Assemble the transmitter and replace the screw.
2-6
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use the remote keyless entry
transmitter or the key.
From the inside, slide
the manual lever forward
or rearward.
The manual lever on each door works only that
door’s lock.
2-7
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door
armrests.
Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors. To unlock
the doors, press the other side of the switch.
Delayed Locking
This feature delays the locking of the doors and the
liftgate when using the power lock or the remote keyless
entry system.
The first press of the power door lock switch or lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter with the
driver’s door open will activate the delay locking. A
chime will sound. All doors and the liftgate can be
reopened for up to five seconds from the time the last
door is closed.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doors
will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by using
the power door lock switch or by pressing the lock button
on the optional remote keyless entry transmitter a
second time.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will not
lock the doors. See Lockout Protection on page 2-11.
You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off. If the
feature is turned off, the doors will lock immediately
when a power door lock switch or remote keyless entry
transmitter lock button is pressed.
Programming Delayed Locking
To turn the delayed locking feature on or off, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on the
driver’s door in the lock position.
2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button twice.
If the delayed locking feature was on, it will now be off.
If the feature was off, it will now be on.
2-8
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-53.
Programmable Locking Feature
Following are the two locking modes that can be
programmed:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
out of PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission
is shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the two programming options
listed previously before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the two programming options
listed previously, and press the lock side of the
power door lock switch to cycle through the
lock options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
programming. If you exceed the 30-second limit,
the locks will automatically lock and unlock and
the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have
left the program mode. If this occurs, repeat
the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter
the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming mode,
the current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-9
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission
is shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to unlock all doors once the transmission is
shifted to PARK (P). The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the four programming options
listed previously before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode you need to do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the four programming options
listed above, and press the unlock side of the
power door lock switch to cycle through the
unlocking options. You will have 30 seconds to
begin programming. If you exceed the 30-second
limit, the locks will automatically lock and unlock
and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you have left the program mode. If this occurs,
repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1
to re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming mode,
the current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-10
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle may have this feature. You can lock the
rear doors so they cannot be opened from the inside by
passengers. To use one of these locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a security
lock lever located on the inside edge of each
rear door.
2. Move the lever down
to engage the security
lock. Move the lever
up to disengage
the security lock.
3. Close the door.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use. If you want to open
the rear door while the security lock is on, unlock the
door and open the door from the outside.
Lockout Protection
This feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the key is in the ignition and a door is open
to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
2-11
Liftgate/Liftglass
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate or liftglass:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your climate control system
to its highest speed and select the control
setting that will force outside air into your
vehicle. See “Climate Control System”
in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-31.
Liftgate Release
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
The liftglass will also unlock when the liftgate is
unlocked.
Press the button on the liftglass to open it. To open the
entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the center of the
liftgate. When the liftgate is opened, the liftglass will lock
after a short delay.
Emergency Release for Opening
Liftgate
1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the
liftgate in the center, to expose the access hole in
the trim panel.
2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole in the
trim panel.
3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position.
Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
4. Reinstall the trim plug.
2-12
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-13
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. With power windows,
the switches operate the windows when the ignition is in
RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-21. The driver’s door also has a switch for
each of the passenger’s windows.
Press down the top of the switch to lower the window
and pull up on the switch to raise the window. If you hold
the switch down for three to seven seconds after the
window has been completely lowered or raised, the
window will not operate for about 15 seconds.
2-14
Express-Down Window
AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and front
passenger’s window switches have an express-down
feature that allows you to lower the window without
holding the switch down. Press down briefly on the
driver’s or front passenger’s window switch labeled
AUTO to activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap
the switch to open the window slightly. The express-down
feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the
top of the switch.
Window Lockout
o
(Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout feature to
prevent passengers from operating the power windows.
The lockout switch is located in front of the window
switches on the driver’s door. A light in the lockout
switch will come on to show that the switch has been
activated. Press the lockout switch again to return
to normal operation.
Sun Visors
Sun Visors with Slide Rod
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side
to cover the driver or passenger side of the front
window. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side
window. It can also be moved along the rod from
side-to-side in this position.
Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull-out
Extension
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Pull the sun visor extender out
for additional coverage. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and swing it to the side to cover the
side window.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps. The lamps will turn off when the cover
is closed.
2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is
equipped with a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Here is how to operate the system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should flash.
3. Close all doors. The security light should turn off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light turns off.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn off
to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock switch
with the door open, or with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. You should also remember that you can
start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm
has been set off.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by
pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The alarm will not stop if you try to unlock a door any
other way.
2-16
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open,
or with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch
is not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-112.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
PASS-Key
®
III
Your PASS-Key
®
III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key
®
III uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-17
PASS-Key
®
III Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key
®
III
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key
®
III is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key
®
III system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s
starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and
fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone
using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the SECURITY light comes on, there may
be a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn
the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-112. If the engine still does
not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See
your dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key
®
III to
have a new key made.
It is possible for the PASS-Key
®
III decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. This
procedure is for programming additional keys only.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a dealer/retailer can service PASS-Key
®
III to have
new keys made. To program additional keys you will
require two current driver’s keys. You must add a step
to the following procedure. After Step 2 repeat Steps 1
and 2 with the second current driver’s key. Then continue
with Step 3.
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to LOCK,
and remove the key.
2-18
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The SECURITY light will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that the
SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes
on and stays on, you will be able to restart your
engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key
®
III system,
however, is not working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected
by the PASS-Key
®
III system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key
®
III key, see your
dealer/retailer to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-30 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-19
Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn
the ignition switch to
four different positions.
The ignition switch
is located on the
center console.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be
in the ON/RUN and the regular brake pedal must
be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition
and transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will
only be able to remove the key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK/OFF and the vehicle has power.
If the steering wheel is locked, move it from right to left
and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off.
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the
accessory ignition position may drain the battery and
prevent your vehicle from starting. Do not operate your
vehicle in the accessory ignition position for a long
period of time.
2-20
R (ON/RUN): This is the position for driving.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
/ (START): This position starts the engine.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave
the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always
remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories may be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
Audio System
DVD Player
Power Windows
Overhead console
Sunroof (if equipped)
These features work when the key is in RUN or ACC.
Once the key is turned from RUN to LOCK, these
features will continue to work up to 10 minutes or
until a door is opened.
2-21
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position this is a
safety feature. To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or 18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and holding it there as you
hold the key in START for up to a maximum
of 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between
each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down.
2-22
When the engine starts, let go of the key and
accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature
is designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals
cannot move farther away from the standard position,
but can move closer for better pedal reach.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature
to operate.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the steering column.
Press the switch forward or backward to move the
pedals closer or farther away from you.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (18°C).
2-23
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment next to the battery box facing
the engine.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle.
The dealer/retailer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Active Fuel Management™
Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to
operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
on your driving conditions.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to achieve
better fuel economy. When greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
2-24
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your gear
shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start the
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P) on
page 2-29. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-30.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have
to fully apply the regular brakes first and then press
the shift lever button before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN.
2-25
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then press the shift lever button and move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of PARK (P)
on page 2-30.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
Snow on page 4-21.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),
push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,
push the accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
2-26
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 4-12.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
It reduces vehicle speed more than DRIVE (D) without
using your brakes. You might choose THIRD (3) instead
of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding roads, when
towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
and when going down a steep hill.
To shift to the THIRD (3) position, you must first press the
large button on the shift handle. While the button is
pressed, move the shifter in the THIRD (3) position.
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than THIRD (3) without using your brakes. You
can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your
speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use your brakes off and on.
To shift to the SECOND (2) position, you must first press
the large button on the shift handle. While the button is
pressed, move the shifter in the SECOND (2) position.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than SECOND (2) without using your brakes. You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission will not shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
To shift to the FIRST (1) position, you must first press the
large button on the shift handle. While the button is
pressed, move the shifter in the FIRST (1) position.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-27
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake
pedal down with your
foot and pull up on
the parking brake lever
located between the seats.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the
button in as you move the parking brake lever all the
way down.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 3-34.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-30.
2-28
Shifting Into PARK (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-30.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set
the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-28
for more information.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is in
PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pressing
the button on the console shift lever. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not fully locked into
PARK (P).
2-29
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P) on
page 2-29.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
This vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is
in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully released,
and
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the regular
brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 5-44 for more information.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-30
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and press the shift lever
button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Repairs were not done correctly.
Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-31
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-31.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-17.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-29.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-30.
2-32
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar
®
and Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass.
There may be three additional buttons for the OnStar
®
system. See your dealer/retailer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar
®
.
See OnStar
®
System on page 2-36 for more
information about the services OnStar
®
provides.
O (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror comes on each time the
ignition is turned to start. To turn the automatic dimming
feature off or back on, press the on/off button. The
indicator light on the mirror is lit when the automatic
dimming feature is on.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button to activate the compass
calibration mode. CAL will be displayed in the compass
window on the mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object.
If the letter C or CAL appears in the compass window,
the compass may need to be reset or calibrated.
2-33
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust
for compass variance. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, your compass could give false
readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until the zone
number is displayed. The number shown is the
current zone number.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the
window on the mirror by pressing the on/off button.
Once you find your zone number, release the
button. After about four seconds, the mirror will return
to the compass display, and the new zone number
will be set. If C or CAL appears in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration.
See “Compass Calibration” listed previously.
2-34
Outside Power Mirror
The outside power mirror
control is located on the
driver’s door.
1. Turn the knob toward the mirror you desire to
adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want the
mirror to go.
3. Adjust the mirror in all four directions so that you
can see the side of your vehicle and the area
behind your vehicle.
4. After adjusting each mirror, turn the control to the
center position so the mirror cannot be moved.
If you reach the mirror’s end of the travel position in any
direction, the mirror will enter a ratcheting mode. This
action is harmless. It is a warning that the mirror can go
no further. To stop this action, back the mirror up by
moving the control in the opposite direction.
Fold the mirror in manually before entering a car wash.
To do this, pull the mirror in toward the vehicle. Push
the mirror back out when finished.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
The passenger’s outside mirror will adjust to a preset tilt
position while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) gear. Curb
view assist may be useful when you are parallel parking.
The mirror will return to normal position when the vehicle
is shifted out of REVERSE (R) gear. Automatic mirror
movement in either direction will follow a short delay.
You can turn this feature on or off through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-53.
2-35
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver
seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are.
Outside Heated Mirrors
Your vehicle may have this feature. When you operate
the rear window defogger, the defogger also warms
the heated driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview
mirrors to help clear them of ice, snow and
condensation.
OnStar
®
System
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,
press the OnStar button and they can contact
Roadside Service for you.
2-36
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar
as provided below. A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide
and the OnStar Terms and Conditions are included
in the vehicle’s OnStar Subscriber glove box
literature. For more information, visit onstar.com or
onstar.ca, contact OnStar at 1–888–4–ONSTAR
(1–888–466–7827) or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or
press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar
advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar, the
Safe & Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections
Plan is included for one year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year, or
upgrade to the Directions & Connections Plan. For more
information, press the OnStar button to speak with an
advisor. Some OnStar services (such as Remote
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance)
may not be available until you register with OnStar.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
Accident Assist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
Remote Diagnostics
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
2-37
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
All Safe and Sound Plan Services
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
Ride Assist
Information and Convenience Services
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the
U.S. or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada,
depending on eligibility. To find out more, refer to
the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box,
visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak
with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button
or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving a few
simple voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information. (Only available in the continental U.S.)
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-91
for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” in
order to activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-38
How OnStar Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar services, your
vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of recording
and transmitting vehicle information. This information
is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center at
the time of an OnStar button press, Emergency button
press or if your airbags or AACN system deploys.
The vehicle information usually includes your GPS
location and, in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the accident that your vehicle
has been involved in (e.g. the direction from which your
vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisor
feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle
also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we can
provide you with location-based services.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless you are in a place where the
wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
OnStar service that involves location information about
your vehicle cannot work unless GPS satellite signals
are unobstructed and available in that place as well.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
You may need to increase the volume of your radio
to hear the OnStar advisor. If the light next to the
OnStar buttons is red, this means that your system is not
functioning properly and should be checked by a dealer.
If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), your
OnStar subscription has expired. You can always press
the blue OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar
equipment is active.
2-39
Universal Home Remote
System
Universal Home Remote System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming
the Universal Home Remote.
2-40
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section.
When programming a garage door, park outside of
the garage. Park directly in line with and facing
the garage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate you are programming.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
To program up to three devices:
1. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the
two outside buttons at the same time, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote indicator
light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step
will erase the factory settings or all previously
programmed buttons.
Do not hold down the buttons for longer than
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons.
2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal
Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied
by the manufacturer of your garage door opener
receiver (motor head unit).
2-41
3. At the same time, press and hold both the
Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door and the
hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the
Universal Home Remote button or the hand-held
transmitter button until Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
the programming is complete and your garage door
should move when the Universal Home Remote
button is pressed and released. You do not need to
continue the programming Steps 6 through 8 and
can stop here.
If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with the programming
Steps 6 through 8.
It may be helpful to have another person available
to assist with the remaining steps.
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed,
locate inside the garage the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete Step 8.
2-42
8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and
hold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen in
Step 3 to control the garage door, for two seconds,
and then release it. If the garage door does not
move, press and hold the same button a second time
for two seconds, and then release it. Again, if the
door does not move, press and hold the same button
a third time for two seconds, and then release.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
the garage door.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming the
Universal Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from the
Universal Home Remote buttons.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace
Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
2-43
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
Erase the programmed buttons when you sell or
terminate your lease.
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal
Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier
in this section, beginning with Step 2.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open, lift the handle up. Use the key to
lock and unlock.
2-44
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has a
cupholder on the
instrument panel
next to the radio.
To open the cupholder, push once on the support
and the cupholder will move into position for use.
To close the cupholder, lift the support up towards the
instrument panel.
A cupholder is located on the front of the center console
and two more are located at the rear of the center
console. To use the rear cupholders, pull down on the lid.
Overhead Console
Your vehicle may have this feature. The overhead
console may include reading lamps, a Universal
Home Remote, and a moonroof switch. See the
following for more information:
Reading Lamps on page 3-18.
Universal Home Remote System on page 2-40.
Moonroof on page 2-48.
Center Console Storage
Grasp the front lever on the center console while lifting
the top to open it.
The console may contain one or more of the following
components:
Rear Seat Audio Controls. See Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) on page 3-89 for more information.
Rear Climate Control. See Rear Climate Control
System on page 3-24 for more information.
Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-19 for more information.
Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment,
lift the cover by pulling up on the latch handle located
underneath the front edge of the armrest.
2-45
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you
or other drivers to have a collision, and of
course damage your vehicle. You may be able
to carry something like this inside. But, never
carry something longer or wider than the
luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a luggage carrier
that allows you to load things on top of your vehicle. The
luggage carrier, if equipped, has side rails attached to the
roof, and places to use for tying things down. These let
you load some other things on top of your vehicle, as long
as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
Crossrails can be purchased from your dealer.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-22.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
is locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, place the
crossrails at the following positions for reduced wind
noise. Place one crossrail at the rear most point of the
vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening of
the rear door.
2-46
Rear Floor Storage Lid
{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is not
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Be sure to secure any such
item properly.
Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removable
storage lid.
To remove the rear floor storage lid, do the following:
1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.
3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from the
forward mounting slots.
To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse the
previous steps. Make sure the lid is secure by applying
slight pressure to the latch until you hear it click.
Cargo Cover
The cargo cover can be used to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
To install the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel
located behind the rear seat.
2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with the
pocket located on the opposite side of the trim
panel and release.
3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the
posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle
to secure it.
2-47
To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully
roll it back up.
2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the
pocket in the trim panel.
3. Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so
that you can remove the shade from the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you
put it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
Cargo Tie Downs
Cargo tie-downs located in the rear of the vehicle are
used to secure small loads.
Moonroof
The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
moonroof. The ignition must be turned to RUN, ACC,
or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active
to operate it. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-21.
The moonroof switch
is located in the
overhead console.
Press and release the back of the button to open the
moonroof. Press and hold the front of the button to
close the moonroof.
With the moonroof closed, press the front of the button
to open the moonroof to the vent position.
The moonroof has a sunshade which can be pulled
forward to block sun rays. If the sunshade is in the
closed position, it will open when the moonroof is opened.
2-48
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-10
Headlamp Washer ........................................3-11
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Headlamps ..................................................3-14
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-16
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-17
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-17
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-18
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-18
Exit Lighting .................................................3-18
Reading Lamps ............................................3-18
Electric Power Management ...........................3-18
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-19
Climate Controls ............................................3-20
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-20
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-24
Rear Climate Control System .........................3-24
Climate Controls Personalization .....................3-25
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-26
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-27
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-28
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-28
Tachometer .................................................3-28
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-29
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-30
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-31
Charging System Light ..................................3-33
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-33
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-34
Antilock Brake System Warning Light ...............3-35
StabiliTrak
®
Service Light ...............................3-36
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator Light ..............................3-36
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-36
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-37
Section 3 Instrument Panel
3-1
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-38
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-40
Security Light ...............................................3-41
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-41
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-42
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-42
Service All-Wheel Drive Light .........................3-42
Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-43
Gate Ajar Light .............................................3-43
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-44
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-44
Check Gas Cap Light ....................................3-44
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-45
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-45
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-48
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-53
Audio System(s) .............................................3-60
Setting the Clock ..........................................3-60
Radio(s) ......................................................3-61
Using an MP3 ..............................................3-71
XM Radio Messages .....................................3-74
Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-76
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System ...........3-77
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-89
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-90
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-91
Radio Reception ...........................................3-91
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-92
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-92
Section 3 Instrument Panel
3-2
NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-24.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-91.
D. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-27.
F. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See Windshield
Wipers on page 3-9.
G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button and Driver
Information Center Buttons. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6 or Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
H. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See Windshield
Washer on page 3-10.
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 3-17.
J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.
K. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp
Override on page 3-18.
L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-60.
M. Climate Controls. See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-20.
N. Gear Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-25.
O. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
P. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-28.
Q. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-19.
R. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-45.
S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-44.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police
and others that you have a problem. The front and rear
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is on
the instrument panel.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the
flashers completely off.
The hazard warning flashers work even if the key is not
in the ignition switch.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
Tilt Wheel
The tilt lever is on the
outboard side of the
steering column, under
the turn signal lever.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you
to change the position, then release the lever to lock.
3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn
and Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.
O Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 3-14.
23 Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass
on page 3-8.
- Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-17.
I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-11.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward and two downward
positions.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever returns
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in
the direction of the turn or
lane change.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until your
lane change is completed. The lever returns by
itself when released.
If the arrows flash more quickly than normal, a signal
bulb could be burned out. Replace the bulb. If the arrows
do not go on at all when you signal a turn, check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-112
and check for burned-out bulbs.
3-7
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a turn signal flasher is used. With
this flasher installed, the signal indicator flashes even if
a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front and
rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they
are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
A chime sounds if the turn signal has been on 3/4 of
a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn signal lever to off.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, the high-beam headlamps turn on. They will
stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster
comes on. Release the lever to return to normal
operation.
3-8
Windshield Wipers
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
7(Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down
before releasing it.
9(Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off
the wipers.
&(Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a
delay between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment
band to set the length of the delay.
x(Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer you move the band toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must
be in delay for this feature to work.
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position for
rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more
information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-57.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-9
Windshield Washer
L(Windshield Washer): To spray washer fluid on
the windshield, press the windshield washer paddle.
The wipers will clear the window and then either stop
or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
This control is located
to the left of the
steering wheel on
the instrument panel.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either 1, 2,
or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the control to 1 or 2.
For steady wiping, turn the control to 3. To turn the
wiper off, turn the control to 0.
To wash the rear window, press the washer symbol
located in the center of the control.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle
as the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
window, check the fluid level.
3-10
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may be equipped with a headlamp
washer system. The headlamp washers clear debris
from the headlamp lenses by soaking the lens with fluid,
waiting for about five seconds, then rinsing the loose
debris from the lenses.
The headlamp washers are located under the
headlamps. The headlamp washers activate for
one wash-wait-rinse cycle when the front windshield
washer button is pressed for the first time after
your vehicle is turned on. The headlamps washers
then activate automatically for one cycle after every
four front windshield washes.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the front windshield will be
washed. See Windshield Washer on page 3-10 for
more information.
Cruise Control
Your vehicle has
cruise control. The
controls are located
on the end of the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
R(On): This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this
symbol to make the vehicle accelerate or resume
to a previously set speed.
T(Set): Press this button to set the speed.
9(Off): This position turns the system off.
3-11
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Some vehicles have
a cruise light on the
instrument panel cluster
that comes on when
the cruise control
is engaged.
3-12
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brakes are applied. This disengages
the cruise control. But it does not need to be reset.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from
on to resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
do not hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the
lever, then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you reach
the desired speed, and then release the switch.
To increase the vehicle speed in very small
amounts, move the switch briefly to resume/
accelerate. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Press in the button at the end of the lever until the
lower desired speed is reached, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
set earlier.
3-13
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. When the brakes are applied this disengages the
cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much
trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
move the cruise control switch to off, or
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak
®
feature,
cruise control will turn off if road conditions cause
StabiliTrak
®
to activate.
If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
The cruise control will turn off automatically if the
traction control system or StabiliTrak
®
system activate,
if your vehicle has either feature.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle
of the turn signal/multifunction lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following four positions:
O(On/Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and Automatic
Headlamps. Turning the control to this position again
turns the automatic lighting system back on. This feature
is not available for vehicles first sold in Canada.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon
how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
3-14
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
5(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder tone sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are manually turned on, if the driver’s door is
open and the ignition is in LOCK or ACC. To turn the
tone off, turn the knob all the way counterclockwise.
In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once
the ignition key is in LOCK.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
The DRL will activate when the following conditions
are met:
The ignition is on.
The exterior lamps knob is in automatic
headlamp mode.
The light sensor detects daytime light.
The transmission is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, either your turn signal lamps or
headlamps will be on. If your vehicle is equipped with the
High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting system option, the
DRL system will turn on your turn signal lamps. If your
vehicle is not equipped with HID, the DRL system will turn
on your headlamps at reduced brightness. The taillamps,
sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. The instrument
panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
3-15
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the Automatic
Headlamp System turns on the headlamps when the
vehicle is started and after the transaxle has been
shifted out of the PARK (P) position. The headlamps,
taillamps, sidemarker, and parking lamps will come
on. The instrument panel lights and radio lights will also
turn on at normal brightness. Once on, the system
remains on during these conditions even if the vehicle
is shifted back into PARK (P).
The vehicle has a light sensor on the top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered or the
system may come on whenever the ignition is on and
the vehicle is shifted out of the PARK (P) position.
The system could also turn on the lamps when driving
through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather
or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the
daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp
systems, so that driving under bridges or bright
overhead street lights does not affect the system.
The DRL and automatic headlamp system are only
affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting
lasting longer than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on after the transmission is
shifted out of PARK (P). Once you leave the garage, it
will take about one minute for the automatic headlamp
system to change to DRL if it is light outside. During
that delay, the instrument panel cluster might not be
as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel
brightness control is in the full bright position.
If the vehicle is running and the automatic headlamp
system is already on, it can be turned off by turning
and releasing the headlamp control at the off position.
The automatic headlamp system stays off until you
turn and release the headlamp control at the off position
again. See Headlamps on page 3-14.
3-16
Fog Lamps
The fog lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
-: The band with this symbol is used to turn the
fog lamps on and off.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps
also turn on. A message will also display on the
DIC when the fog lamps are turned on or off. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
To turn the fog lamps on or off, turn the fog lamp
band on the lever up to the dot and release it.
The band will return to its original position.
If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog
lamps will turn off. They will turn back on again
when you switch back to low-beam headlamps.
When the Fog Lamps are turned on or off, a message
will appear on the Driver Information Center. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-48.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps
to be on along with the fog lamps.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the
interior lights.
To turn on the dome lamps, turn the knob completely
clockwise as far as it will go. The dome lamps stay
on until they are turned off.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps automatically come on when a door
is opened, unless the dome lamp override button
is pressed in.
The lamps can also be turned on and off by turning
the instrument panel brightness control clockwise to
the farthest position.
3-17
Dome Lamp Override
The dome override button
is located to the left of the
steering column on the
instrument panel.
To turn the dome lamps off, press the button. The dome
lamps will remain off when a door is open. This will
override the illuminated entry feature unless you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the
button again. The dome lamps will come on when
you open any door.
Entry Lighting
The vehicle has entry lighting.
When any door is opened, the dome lamps come
on as long as the dome override lamp override button
is not pressed in. When all the doors are closed,
the lamps stay on for a short period of time and then
turn off automatically. If you use the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the vehicle, the interior
lamps come on for a short time whether or not the
dome lamp override is on.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. If the dome override
is off, these lights will stay on for a short period of time
and then will go out.
Reading Lamps
Press the indented part of the lenses on the reading
lamps located in the overhead console to turn them
on or off.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When the
state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage
3-18
or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center
(DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads,
and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery.
It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the
vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle
speed to generate more power, whenever needed.
It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some
accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or
Service Battery Charging System. If this message is
displayed, it is recommended that the driver reduce the
electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-48.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, and vanity
lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes
when the ignition is off. This will keep the battery from
running down.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return to normal operation:
Shut off all lamps and close all doors.
Turn the ignition key to RUN.
This feature will also turn off the parking lamps and
headlamps under most circumstances, if they are left on.
If you would like to turn them back on, turn the exterior
lamps knob.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
With the accessory power outlets, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
Your vehicle has three accessory power outlets. There
are two outlets located below the climate controls
and one outlet is on the rear of the center floor console.
Remove the cover from the outlet to use the outlet.
Be sure to put the cover back on when not using the
accessory power outlet.
3-19
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from
the plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle. When your vehicle is
first started and the climate control system is on, or
if the climate control system has been turned on, the
display will show the driver’s temperature setting for
five seconds. Then it will show the outside temperature.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed to the floor. Press the AUTO button,
the mode button, the fan arrows, or either temperature
knob to turn the system on.
3-20
C(Mode): Press this button to manually select the
air delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel, or
windshield outlets. The system will stay in the selected
mode until the mode button is pressed again or the
AUTO button is pressed.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower
the temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle. The
display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the driver.
This knob can also adjust the passenger’s side
temperature setting if the two are linked.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise
or lower the temperature on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. The display will show the temperature
setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing
toward the passenger. The passenger’s temperature
setting can be set to match and link to the driver’s
temperature setting by pressing and holding the
AUTO button for three seconds. When adjusting the
driver’s side temperature setting, the passenger’s
side temperature setting will follow and both arrows
will appear on the display. The passenger’s side
temperature setting also resets and relinks to the
driver’s side temperature setting if the vehicle has
been off for more than three hours.
Outside Air Temperature Display
A new outside temperature reading will be displayed
if the vehicle has been off for more than three hours.
If the vehicle has been off for less than three hours,
the old temperature reading may be displayed because
underhood heat is affecting the true outside temperature.
Underhood heat can also affect the outside temperature
while the engine is running. It may also take several
minutes of driving before the display updates to
the actual outside temperature.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active, the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery mode, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air outlet mode will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will
run continuously when the outside temperature
is over approximately 40°F (4°C). The air inlet will
normally be set to outside air. If it’s hot outside,
the air inlet will automatically switch to recirculate
inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle.
3-21
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F (22°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to adjust. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting may not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Manual Operation
To change the current setting, select one of the
following:
w9x(Fan): This button allows you to manually
adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fan
speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed. The
display will change to show you the selected fan speed
and the driver’s side temperature setting for five seconds.
C(Mode): Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing
the button until the desired mode appears on the display.
The display will change to show you the selected air
delivery mode and the driver’s temperature setting for
five seconds.
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half
of the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is directed
toward the windshield and the side window outlets.
Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer
air to the floor outlets.
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Some air also comes out of the defroster
and side window outlets. The recirculation button
cannot be selected in floor mode.
@(Recirculation): Press this button to turn
recirculation mode on or off. When this button is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will also come
on to let you know that it is activated. Recirculation
mode is used to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle.
Use this mode to help prevent outside odors and/or
dust from entering your vehicle or to help cool the
air inside of your vehicle more quickly. Recirculation
mode can be used with vent and bi-level modes, but it
cannot be used with floor, defog or defrost modes.
Defog and defrost modes are described later in
this section.
3-22
If recirculation mode is selected with floor, defog, or
defrost modes, the indicator will flash three times and
then turn off indicating the selection is not available.
You may also notice that the air conditioning compressor
will run while in recirculation mode. This is normal
and will help to prevent fogging.
If the weather is cold and damp, the system may cause
the windows to fog while using recirculation mode.
If the windows do start to fog, select defog or defrost
mode and increase fan speed.
Recirculation mode, if selected, will be cleared when
the engine is turned off.
#A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn the air conditioning system on or off.
When the system is on, the system will automatically
begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of your
vehicle. The air conditioning symbol will appear on the
display when the air conditioning is on and will turn
off when the air conditioning is off.
If you turn the air conditioning off while in front defrost
or defog mode, the air conditioning symbol will turn
off, however, the A/C compressor will remain on to
help de-humidify the air inside the vehicle. If one of
the other modes is selected the compressor will
then turn the A/C off until it is selected again or the
AUTO button is pressed.
To avoid fogging the inside glass on rainy and humid
days at a temperature above freezing, press the
air conditioning button to run the A/C compressor. Also
it is best to avoid the use of the recirculation mode
except when maximum air conditioning performance
is needed or for short times to avoid exterior odors.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of moisture
condensing on the cool window glass. This can be
reduced if the climate control system is used properly.
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear
fog or frost from your windshield.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of
fog or moisture. This setting will deliver air to the
floor and windshield outlets.
0(Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button
to clear the windshield and side windows of frost or
fog quickly. The system will automatically control the
fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO mode.
If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer,
your air conditioning compressor will automatically
run to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-23
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
An indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If you need
additional warming time, press the button again.
The heated mirrors will also come on when you press
this button. See Outside Heated Mirrors on page 2-36.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the
sides of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
Operation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, select
maximum blower speed for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your window.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Rear Climate Control System
The lower buttons on the rear seat audio are used to
adjust the rear seat climate controls. The temperature
of the air coming through the rear outlets is determined
by the front passenger’s temperature setting.
3-24
z9y(Fan): Press this button to adjust the fan
speed.
z\y(Mode): Press this button to change the
direction of airflow in the rear seat area to either vent,
bi-level or floor mode.
P(On/Off): Press this button to turn the rear climate
controls on or off.
The rear control will only turn on if the front is on and
not in defrost mode.
Climate Controls Personalization
Your vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Center (DIC). You can store and recall the climate
control settings for temperature, air delivery mode
and fan speed for two different drivers. The personal
choice settings recalled are determined by the
transmitter used to enter the vehicle. After the button
with the unlock symbol on a remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed, the climate control will adjust to
the last settings of the identified driver. The settings
can also be changed by pressing one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door.
When adjustments are made, the new settings are
automatically saved for the driver.
3-25
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to the warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As the
details show on the next few pages, some warning lights
come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when there
is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells
you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even
dangerous. So please get to know your vehicle’s
warning lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information
Center (DIC) that works along with the warning lights
and gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-45 for more information.
3-26
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-27
Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Press the trip stem located on
the instrument panel cluster.
If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of
the old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle
has been driven since you last set the trip odometer
to zero.
The odometer works together with the Driver Information
Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A and Trip B odometer.
See “Trip Information” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-45.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Press the trip stem on the instrument
panel cluster.
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
3-28
Safety Belt Reminders
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-61 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for
several seconds and then flash for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-29
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
Airbag System on page 1-52.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The light should go out
and the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when you start the engine. If the light does not come on
then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problem
with the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information
Center (DIC) message may also come on. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-48 for more
information.
3-30
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. Your
rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status indicator.
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
United States
Canada
3-31
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more on this, including
important safety information.
3-32
Charging System Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
on the ignition key, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show
you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-48
for more information. This light could indicate that
there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If you must drive a short distance with the
light on, be certain to turn off all the accessories,
such as the radio and air conditioner.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is on,
this gage shows the battery’s state of charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage may
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading. This is normal. Readings between the low
and high warning zones indicate the normal operating
range. The voltmeter gage may also read lower when
in fuel economy mode. This is normal.
United States Canada
3-33
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake does not release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means your vehicle has a brake problem.
A chime may also sound when the light comes on.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-28.
United States
Canada
3-34
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning
light on can lead to an accident. If the light
is still on after you have pulled off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this
light comes on briefly
when the engine
is started.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, your vehicle still has brakes, but
not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, your vehicle does not have antilock
brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-48 for
all brake related DIC messages.
3-35
StabiliTrak
®
Service Light
This light will come
on briefly when the
engine is started.
This light will come on if a problem is detected in
the StabiliTrak
®
system.
For more information see StabiliTrak
®
System
on page 4-5.
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator Light
This warning light should
come on briefly when the
engine is started.
During most driving conditions, this light will not come
on. If the StabiliTrak
®
System is actively controlling
the stability and/or traction of the vehicle, this light
will blink. This is normal.
This light will come on if any portion of the system has
been manually turned off or a problem is detected
in the system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Center, a message will appear also, see DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-48 and StabiliTrak
®
System
on page 4-5 for more information.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, the engine
coolant has overheated.
United States Canada
3-36
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-30.
Tire Pressure Light
Your vehicle has a
tire pressure light.
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started
and provides information about tire pressures and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is Solid
This indicates that one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-48 for more
information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it
is safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Tires on page 5-60 for more information.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is Solid
This indicates that there may be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on solid for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with
every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-70 for more information.
3-37
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine
light comes on to
indicate that there
is an OBD II problem
and service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
Light Flashing A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.
Light On Steady An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
3-38
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the
cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-7. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed
up. This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your dealer/
retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic
tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
3-39
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This can
happen if you have recently replaced the battery or
if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle
for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
United States
Canada
3-40
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or other problems
causing low oil pressure.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
Security Light
For information
regarding this light
and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-16.
Cruise Control Light
If your vehicle has
a Driver Information
Center (DIC), this light
will come on when
the cruise control is set.
See Cruise Control on page 3-11 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-48 for more information.
3-41
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light comes on
when a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s
performance occurs.
The vehicle can be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
If this light stays on, see your dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair.
This light may also come on if there is a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If this happens, take the vehicle in for service
as soon as possible.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes
on when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8
for more information.
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
This light should come
on briefly when you
turn on the ignition,
as a check to show
you it is working.
3-42
The service all-wheel drive light comes on to indicate
that there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by
the system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system
is also designed to assist your dealer in correctly
diagnosing a malfunction.
Check Gages Warning Light
The check gages light
will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are
driving, check your coolant temperature and
engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in
the warning zones.
Gate Ajar Light
If this light comes on,
the liftgate or liftglass
is not completely shut.
Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with the
liftgate or liftglass even partially open.
3-43
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. To
turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on page 5-4.
Check Gas Cap Light
If your vehicle has
this light, it will come
on if your gas cap is
not securely fastened.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-38 for
more information.
United States
Canada
3-44
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
The DIC buttons are located on the center of the
instrument panel, above the radio. The DIC can display
information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy,
customization features, and warning/status messages.
r (Fuel Information): Press this button to display the
fuel range, fuel used, average fuel economy, and engine
oil life. See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-45
for more information.
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressure, and
timer. See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-45
for more information.
| (Hazard): Press this button to turn the hazard
warning flashers on and off. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6 for more information.
q (Customization): Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-53 for more information.
r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge DIC
messages and clear them from the DIC display.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing the trip stem on the instrument
panel cluster or any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge
any warning or service messages.
You should take any message that appears on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear, not
correct the problem.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the center of the
instrument panel, above the radio. These buttons are fuel
information, trip information, customization, and select.
The button functions are detailed in the following pages.
3-45
Fuel Information Button
r
(Fuel Information): Press this button to scroll
through the fuel range, fuel used, average fuel economy,
and the engine oil life system.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling. It is
based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for
one second while FUEL USED is displayed.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG. ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG),
kilometers per liter (km/L), or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) your vehicle is getting based on current
and past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button for one second while
AVG. ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy is not
reset, it will be continually updated each time you drive.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-22.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
on page 5-18 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-3.
Trip Information Button
3
(Trip Information): Press this button to scroll
through the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressures,
and timer.
3-46
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode
shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven
in either miles or kilometers. Pressing the trip stem
located on the instrument panel cluster with the vehicle
off will also display the odometer.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in
either miles or kilometers.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A
or TRIP B.
You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
displayed by pressing the trip stem. If you press and
hold the trip stem or the select button for more than
four seconds, the display will show the distance traveled
since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B.
Tire Pressures: Press the trip information button
until TIRE PRESSURES appears on the display. This
mode shows the tire pressure in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the select button
to scroll through the following information:
LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
driver’s side tire.
RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
passenger’s side tire.
LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
driver’s side tire.
RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
passenger’s side tire.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has passed
since the timer was last reset, not including time the
ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as long
as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes, and 59 seconds (99:59:59), after which the
display will roll back to zero.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
3-47
Customization Button
q
(Customization): Press this button to access
the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize
the settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-53 for more information.
Select Button
r
(Select): Press the select button to reset certain
DIC functions, turn off or acknowledge messages on
the DIC display, and set your customization settings.
For example, this button will allow you to reset the trip
odometers, turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message,
and enables you to scroll through and select the
language in which the DIC information will appear.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear one after another.
Some messages may not require immediate action.
Press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel
or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel
cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be removed from the DIC display.
Take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only make
the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message displays when the engine oil needs to
be changed and service is required for your vehicle.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-3 and Engine
Oil on page 5-18 for more information. Also see
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-22 for information
on how to reset the message. This message clears
itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC,
stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on page 5-60, Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-67. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values.
3-48
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-45.Ifthe
tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning
light comes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-37.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
This message displays if the washer fluid level is low.
Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid
reservoir clears this message. See Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 5-39. This message clears itself after
10 seconds, or you can manually clear it from the
DIC display.
CURB VIEW ACTIVATED
This message displays when the passenger outside
rearview mirror moves into the curb view position.
See Outside Curb View Assist Mirror on page 2-35
for more information.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears
on the DIC.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINE
OVERHEATED
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed
above normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-30 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
cooling system temperature gets hot. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-30 for the proper course
of action. This message clears when the coolant
temperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
FRONT FOG LAMPS OFF
This message displays if the fog lamps are turned off.
The message clears after 10 seconds. If you turn on
the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps also turn
off and this message appears on the DIC. The fog
lamps turn back on again when you switch back
to low-beam headlamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-17
and Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7 for
more information.
3-49
FRONT FOG LAMPS ON
This message displays if the fog lamps are turned on.
The message clears after 10 seconds. See Fog
Lamps on page 3-17 and Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-7 for more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Low
Fuel Warning Light on page 3-44, Filling the Tank on
page 5-7, and Fuel on page 5-4 for more information.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message may display if the outside temperature
reaches a level where ice could form on the roadway.
Adjust your driving accordingly. If the temperature
rises to a safe level, the message clears. This message
clears itself after 10 seconds, or you can manually
clear it from the DIC display.
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in the
transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
side rear door is not fully closed. Stop and turn off
the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-18 for more information.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
See Engine Oil on page 5-18.
3-50
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger door is not fully closed. Stop and turn off
the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate
and liftglass. See Liftgate/Liftglass on page 2-12.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on
the DIC display.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed. Stop and
turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions,
and close the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect
the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 and Airbag System on page 1-52 for
more information.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays if a problem occurs with the
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon
as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE CHARGING SYS (System)
This message displays if there is a problem with the
battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the
charging system light may also turn on in the instrument
panel cluster. See Charging System Light on page 3-33.
The battery will not be charging at an optimal rate and
the vehicle will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy
mode. The vehicle is safe to drive, however you should
have the electrical system checked by your
dealer/retailer.
3-51
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If this message displays, it means there may be a
problem with the StabiliTrak
®
system. If this message
appears, try to reset the system by performing the
following: stop; turn off the engine; then start the
engine again. If this message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. You should see your dealer/retailer
for service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however,
you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak
®
, so reduce
your speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-37. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 5-71 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
STABILITRAK ACTIVE
This message displays anytime the StabiliTrak
®
system
activates to maintain vehicle stability. Any combination
of engine speed management, brake traction control,
and stability control displays this message.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message may display if driving conditions delay
StabiliTrak
®
system initialization. This is normal.
Once the system initializes, this message will no
longer be displayed on the DIC.
STABILITRAK OFF
This message displays when you press the StabiliTrak
®
button for more than five seconds or when stability
control has been automatically disabled. The StabiliTrak
®
button is located on the transmission shift handle.
To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak
®
on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak
®
off
if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and
you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you
are driving in extreme off-road conditions and require
more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-21. To turn the StabiliTrak
®
system back on, press the StabiliTrak
®
button again.
The message may display if the brake system warning
light is on. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-34.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
3-52
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
This message may display and a chime may sound if
the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly. Fully
reinstall the fuel cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-7.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. This message remains on until it is
manually cleared from the DIC display. The DIC
message is also cancelled if the ignition is turned off.
The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon light
may come on again during a second trip if the fuel cap
is still not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 3-38 for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when you momentarily press
the StabiliTrak
®
button located on the transmission
shift handle. In this mode, stability control and the
brake-traction control are functional. Engine speed
management will be modified and the driven wheels
can spin more freely. For more details on this mode,
see StabiliTrak
®
System on page 4-5.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the
turn signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one setting
based on your preference. All of the customizable
options listed may not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P). To avoid excessive
drain on the battery, it is recommended that the
headlamps are turned off.
Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.
After pressing the customization button, VEHICLE
SETTINGS momentarily displays before going to a
customization option.
3-53
Lock Doors
Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS:
IN GEAR appears in the display. To select your
preference for automatic locking, press the select button
while LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following settings:
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h)
for three seconds.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-9
for more information.
Unlock Doors
Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS:
IN PARK appears in the display. To select your
preference for automatic unlocking, press the select
button while UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll
through the following settings:
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-9
for more information.
3-54
Lock Feedback
Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK:
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
press the select button while LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH
is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following settings:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the lock symbol on the RKE transmitter and the horn
will chirp the second time you press the lock button.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the RKE transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
Unlock Feedback
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS appears in the display. To select
your preference for the feedback you will receive when
unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following settings:
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp
the second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the RKE transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the RKE transmitter and the horn will
chirp the second time you press the unlock button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-55
Headlamp Delay
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY: 10 SEC appears in the display. To select your
preference for how long the headlamps will stay on
after you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following settings:
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds) (default):
The headlamps will stay on for 10 seconds.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC: The headlamps will
stay on for 20 seconds.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC: The headlamps will
stay on for 40 seconds.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute): The headlamps
will stay on for 1 minute.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN: The headlamps will
stay on for 2 minutes.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN: The headlamps will
stay on for 3 minutes.
HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF: The headlamps will
not turn on.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
Perimeter Lights
Press the customization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS: ON appears in the display. To select your
preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following settings:
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-56
Easy Exit Seat
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
SEAT: OFF appears in the display. To select your
preference for seat position exit, press the select
button while EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following settings:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall
will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move
to the exit position when the key is removed from
the ignition.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
See “Easy Exit Seat” under Memory Seat, Mirrors,
and Pedals on page 1-3 for more information.
Seat Recall
Press the customization button until SEAT RECALL:
OFF appears in the display. To select your preference
for recall of the driver’s memory seat and adjustable
pedals, if your vehicle has this feature, press the select
button while SEAT RECALL: OFF is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following settings:
SEAT RECALL: OFF (default): The driver’s memory
seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will
only be recalled when the memory button 1 or 2
is pressed.
SEAT RECALL: AT KEY IN: The driver’s memory
seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will be
recalled when you put the key in the ignition.
SEAT RECALL: ON REMOTE: The driver’s memory
seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will
be recalled when you unlock the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-3
for more information.
3-57
Curb View
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW: OFF
appears in the display. To select your preference for
curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW:
OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following settings:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): The passenger’s outside
mirror will not be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in any
forward gear, the mirror will return to the normal driving
position, following a short delay.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
See Outside Curb View Assist Mirror on page 2-35 for
more information.
Alarm Warning
Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING:
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
for alarm warning, press the select button while
ALARM WARNING: BOTH is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following settings:
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16 for more
information.
3-58
Language
Press the customization button until LANGUAGE:
ENGLISH appears in the display. To select your
preference for display language, press the select button
while LANGUAGE: ENGLISH is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold the customization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
Francais will be in French, and Espanol will be in
Spanish. When you see the language that you would
like, release both buttons. The DIC will then display
the information in the language you chose.
You can also scroll through the different languages by
pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds,
as long as you are in the odometer mode.
Units
Press the customization button until UNITS: U.S.
(ENGLISH) appears in the display. To select the units
of measurement in which the DIC will display vehicle
information, press the select button while UNITS: U.S.
(ENGLISH) is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following settings:
UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) (default): All information
will be displayed in English units.
UNITS: METRIC (km/L): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
To select a setting and exit out of the customizable
options, press the customization button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-59
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself with
its features.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed. Always
keep your eyes on the road and your mind
on the drive avoid engaging in extended
searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
Familiarize yourself with its operation.
Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,
or other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-21 for more
information.
Setting the Clock
Press and hold H until the correct hour and AM or PM
displays. Press and hold M until the correct minute
displays. The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
3-60
Radio(s)
Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.
Radio with CD (MP3)
Radio with Six-Disc CD Player
3-61
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca
or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Playing the Radio
P
(Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or to decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to display the time,
while the ignition is turned off.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP button while
in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,
Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
button until the desired option displays, then hold
this knob for two seconds. One beep sounds and the
selected display becomes the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Each higher setting
allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the
same while driving. NONE displays if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. To turn automatic volume
off, press this button until AVOL OFF (automatic
volume off) displays.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The selection
displays.
e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
tSEEK u: Press and release the right or the
left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
3-62
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCAN displays and one beep
sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press
either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds. PSCN displays and the
two beeps sound. The radio goes to a preset station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
preset station. Press either arrow again or one of
the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio only scans preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service and
MP3 Features): If the current station has a message,
the information symbol displays. Press this button to
see the message. The message can display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the information
button. A new group of words display after every
press of this button. Once the complete message
displays, the information symbol disappears until another
new message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the information button. The
last message can be viewed until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
No Info displays.
1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons) (Radio with Six-Disc
CD Player: Press this button to play stations that
are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio only seeks preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-63
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ (automatic equalization) to select
the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station that
was set, returns and the equalization that was
selected is stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
e
(Bass/Treble): Push and release this knob until
BASS or TREB (treble) displays. Turn this knob to
increase or to decrease the tone. The display shows
the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or has
static, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
while in bass or treble, push and hold the tone knob.
One beep sounds.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone or
speaker control displays. ALL CENTERED displays
and a beep sounds.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical.
The equalization one through seven options are
included only if your vehicle has the Bose
®
system.
Press the AUTO EQ button to select equalization
settings designed for equalization one through seven.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the tone knob until BASS and
TREB displays.
3-64
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e
(Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, push and release
this knob until BAL (balance) displays. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the speaker knob until
FADE displays. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, while in fade or balance, push the tone knob,
then push it again and hold it until one beep sounds.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED
displays and a beep sounds.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT button to activate category select
mode. The current category displays.
2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.
3. Press either SEEK arrow, once the desired category
is displayed, to go to that category’s first station.
4. Press either SEEK arrow again, to go to another
station within that category and the category is
displayed. If CAT disappears from the display,
go back to Step 1.
5. Press CAT to exit category select mode or wait
for CAT to time out.
If the radio cannot find the desired category,
NOT FOUND displays and the radio returns to the
last station being played.
3-65
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If CAL ERR displays it means that the radio has
not been configured properly for your vehicle and it
must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when
the THEFTLOCK
®
system has locked up. Take your
vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-74 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
To insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
eject button or the DISP (display) knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, READING and the CD symbol
displays. As each new track starts to play, the track
number also displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
For vehicles that have a radio with a Six-Disc CD player,
see the following:
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right
of the slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
3-66
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located to
the right of the slot, flashes and LOAD # displays.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert the
CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player
pulls the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light flashes
again. After the light stops flashing and turns green,
load another CD. The CD player takes up to six
CDs. Do not try to load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio begins to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD displays.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number appears on the display.
To play a specific CD, first press the CD button, then
press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the
CD. A small bar appears under the CD number that
is playing and the track number appears on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located to
the right of the slot, flashes and EJECT ALL
displays.
2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
REMOVE CD # displays. The CD ejects and
can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light flashes
again and another CD ejects.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or
the eject button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player. If CD is pushed
back into the player, before the 25 second time ends,
the player senses an error and tries to eject the CD
several times before stopping.
3-67
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject
a CD after it is pushed in manually. The player’s
25-second eject timer resets at each press of the eject
button, causing the player to not eject the CD until
the 25-second time period has elapsed.
Care of Your CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
1
r(Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
within the track.
2
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
within the track.
N (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one track or an
entire CD can be repeated.
3-68
To use repeat, do the following:
To repeat the track you are listening to, press
and release the repeat button. RPT ON displays.
Press this button again to turn off repeat play.
RPT OFF displays.
For the Radio with Six-Disc CD player, repeat
the CD you are listening to by pressing and
holding the repeat button for two seconds.
RPT ON displays. Press this button again to
turn off repeat play. RPT OFF displays.
4
y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM ON displays. Press this pushbutton again to
turn off random play. RDM OFF displays.
y (Random) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player):
The CD tracks can be listened to in random, rather
than sequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.
To use random, do one of the following:
To play the tracks on the CD in random order,
press and release the random button. RANDOM
ONE displays. Press this button again to turn
off random play.
To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold this button for
more than two seconds. A beep sounds and
RANDOM ALL displays. Press this button again
to turn off random play.
tSEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If a track is
approximately 10 seconds into its song, press either
the left or right arrow twice to get to the previous
or next track.
To scan tracks, press either arrow for more than
two seconds until one beep sounds and SCAN displays.
The CD searches the previous or next tracks at
two seconds per track. Press either arrow to stop
scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs on a Radio with Six-Disc CD
player, press and hold either arrow for more than
four seconds until CD SCAN displays and a beep
sounds. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of
the first track of each loaded CD. Press either arrow
again, to stop scanning.
3-69
DISP (Display): Press this button to see how long the
current track has been playing. The elapsed time of
the track appears on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press this
button until the desired option displays, then hold the
button for two seconds. One beep sounds and the
selected display becomes the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
B (CD): Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is
loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization is set whenever a CD is played. See
“AUTO EQ” listed previously for more information. If you
select an EQ setting for your CD, it is activated each
time a CD plays.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3 feature.
If it has this feature, it is capable of playing an MP3
CD-R disc. For more information on how to play an
MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3 on page 3-71
later in this section.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:
It is very hot. When the temperature returns
to normal, the CD should play.
You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
Using an MP3 on page 3-71 later in this section.
There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-70
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc.
Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,
other file extensions might not work.
Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
can display when files are recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
one folder for each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
Make sure to finalize the disc while burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names
can use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length
of the file, folder, or playlist names. You can also play
an MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders.
The system can support up to 11 folders in depth,
though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum
in order to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during playback.
If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player
lets you access and navigate up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum will not play.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders
and no compressed files directly beneath them,
the player advances to the next folder in the file
structure that contains compressed audio files.
The empty folder is not displayed.
3-71
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks play in the following order:
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have
played, play continues from files according to
their numerical listing. After playing the last track
from the last folder, play begins again at the
first track of the first folder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode was chosen as the default display.
See DISP later in this section for more information.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that is displayed is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD should
begin playing and the CD symbol displays. To insert a
CD with the ignition off, first press the eject button or
the DISP (display) knob.
3-72
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
1
r(Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse
within the same track. If this pushbutton is held
or pressed more than once, the player continues
moving backward through the CD.
2
[ (Fast Forward): Press this pushbutton to fast
forward within the track. If this pushbutton is held
or pressed more than once, the player continues
moving forward through the CD.
3
N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a
track over again. RPT On displays. The current track
continues to repeat. Press this pushbutton again to
turn off repeat play. RPT OFF displays.
4
y (Random): To random the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FLDR RDM displays. Once all of the tracks in the current
folder or playlist have played, the system moves on to
the next folder or playlist and plays all of the tracks
in random order.
To play all the tracks on the CD in random order, press
and hold this pushbutton for two seconds. A beep
sounds and CD RDM displays. This feature does not
work with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either
SEEK arrow takes the CD to the next or previous
randomized track.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RDM displays.
5
! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the previous folder. Pressing this
button while in folder random mode takes the CD to
the previous folder and randomizes the tracks in
that folder.
6
# (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
the first track in the next folder. Pressing this button
while in folder random mode takes the CD to the next
folder and randomizes the tracks in that folder.
tSEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Press either arrow for more than
two seconds and SCAN displays. The radio scans
the previous or next tracks at two tracks per second.
Release the arrow to stop scanning and to play the track.
3-73
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display shows only eight characters, but there
can be up to four pages of text. If there are more than
eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist name,
pressing this knob within two seconds takes the CD to
the next page of text. If there are no other pages to
be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds takes
the CD to the next display mode.
Track mode displays the current track number
and the ID3 tag song name.
Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder
or playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
Time of day mode displays the time of day and
the ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, press the
DISP knob until the desired option displays, then
hold this knob for two seconds. One beep sounds
and the selected display becomes the default.
4 (Information): INFO displays whenever a current
track has ID3 tag information. Press this button to
display the artist name and album contained in the tag.
INFO disappears from the display when the information
in the ID3 tag has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside
the radio for future listening.
B (CD): Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is
loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization is set whenever a CD is played. See
“AUTO EQ” listed previously for more information. If you
select an EQ setting for your CD, it is activated each
time a CD plays.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
XM Radio Messages
If you have a Radio with CD, you will receive these
radio display messages.
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
3-74
No Signl: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading: The radio system is acquiring and processing
audio and text data. No action is needed. This message
should disappear shortly.
Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune to another channel.
CH Unavl: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Info: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
NotFound: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Lock: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates
with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
If you have a Radio with Six-Disc CD, you will receive
these radio display messages.
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
3-75
No Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune to another channel.
CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another
station for that preset button.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Info: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Not Found: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Locked: The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates
with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended
to minimize driver distraction. Technology alone,
no matter how advanced, can never replace your
own judgment. See the Navigation System manual for
some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
3-76
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system
includes a DVD player, a video display screen,
two sets of wireless headphones, and a remote
control.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only,
not intended for the driver while driving.
Parental Control
This button is located behind the video screen. Press
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
other button operations from the remote control and
the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
Press this button again to restore operation of the
DVD player.
This button can also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
Headphones
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
when they are on. If the light does not illuminate,
the batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” following for more information.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob.
To adjust the volume, adjust this knob.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
if they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes to save battery power. The signal may
be lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
(if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,
instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing
through the RSE.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
3-77
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones,
do the following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door
located on the left side of the headphones.
Slide the battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the
door screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks.
The yellow connector inputs video and the red and
white connectors input right and left audio. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection
of the auxiliary device.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system,
connect an external auxiliary device to the color-coded
RCA jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and
the RSE system power on. If the RSE system had
been previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the
SRCE button on the faceplate or the remote control
will switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
How to Change the Video Format when
in the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
In some countries, the video format may be in the
PAL system. To change the video format, perform
the following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the
Video Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
3-78
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can
be heard through the following possible sources:
Wireless Headphones
Vehicle Speakers
Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to
the vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE
system may be selected as an audio source on the radio
if the RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system
is selected as an audio source on the radio, adjust
the speaker volume on the radio, if necessary. If the
RSE system power is not on, the RSE system will
not be an available source on the radio. Refer to the
radio information for the radio that your vehicle has
for more information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system can be selected as
an audio source on the rear seat audio system if the
RSE system power is on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
on page 3-89 for more information.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position.
The video screen contains the transmitters for the
wireless headphones and the remote control. If the
screen is in the closed position, the signals will not be
available for the operation of the headphones or
the remote control.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-79
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on
the DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote
control. See “Remote Control” later in this section
for more information.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country
that the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code
is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this
DVD player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported
if formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW
media may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is
inserted into the DVD player.
When using the wired headphones, not included,
if the front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio
with Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite
Radio Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio
for these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that
is currently playing through the RSE.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
3-80
DVD Player Buttons (Without Sunroof)
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system
on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate
when the power is on.
X(Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the color,
tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and dynamic
range compression. The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
press this button to display the feature, then press
and hold this button. The default setting will appear
on the display.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold
this button to display and to remove the track and time
information.
n, q, p, o(Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r(Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
3-81
DVD Player Buttons (With Sunroof)
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of
a DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD
is playing to pause it. Press this button again to
continue the play of the DVD or CD.
c / X (Stop/Eject): Press this button to stop
playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD.
Press this button twice to return to the beginning
of the DVD.
Press and hold this button for more than three seconds
to eject a DVD or CD.
Playing a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
if the vehicle is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
or when RAP is active.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping
of the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.
If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer
to the on-screen instructions.
3-82
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate
to eject the disc. There is not an eject button on
the remote control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
period of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD
player. The DVD player will not resume play of the
disc automatically.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect
the ability of the RSE system to receive signals from
the remote control. If the remote control does not seem
to be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area
or in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Storage in
extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
3-83
Remote Control Buttons
O(Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o(Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the color,
tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and dynamic
range compression. The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
e(Audio): Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
r(Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t(Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
3-84
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides you with the capability of direct chapter,
title, and track number selection.
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a number to clear the number(s).
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
q(Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
menu is active.
|(Camera Angle): Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when
a DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitles
and to move through subtitle options when a DVD
is playing. The format and content of this function
will vary for each disc.
[(Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of
a DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
u(Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to
advance to the beginning of the next track or chapter.
This button may not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
3-85
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Problem Recommended Action
No power. The ignition might not be
in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
The parental control button
might have been turned on.
The power indicator light
flashes.
Disc will not play. The system might be off.
The parental control button
might have been turned on.
The power indicator light
will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
Problem Recommended Action
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
Check the display mode
settings in the display menu.
The disc was ejected,
but it was pulled back
into the DVD player.
The disc is being stored in the
DVD player. Press the eject
button again to eject the disc.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both devices.
Change the Video Format to
PAL or NTSC. See “Stereo
RCA Jacks” previously for
how to change the video
format.
The language in the
audio or on the screen
is wrong.
Check the audio or language
selection in the main
DVD menu.
The remote control
does not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and
the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make
sure they are not dead
or installed incorrectly.
The parental control button
might have been turned on.
The power indicator light
will flash.
3-86
Problem Recommended Action
After stopping the
player,
I push Play but
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off
and sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed
two times the DVD player
will begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both devices.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Turn the DVD power off,
then on, then press
the load/eject button
on the DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
Problem Recommended Action
Sometimes the
wireless headphone
audio cuts out or
buzzes.
Check for obstructions, low
batteries, reception range,
and interference from
cellular telephone towers
or by using your cellular
telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones
are facing the front of
the vehicle.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer/retailer
for assistance.
The DVD is playing,
but there is no picture
or sound.
Check that the DVD player
is in DVD mode.
The audio/video skips
or jumps.
The DVD or CD could
be dirty, scratched,
or damaged.
The audio from the
radio for the Radio with
Six-Disc CD and XM™
has taken over the
audio from the DVD
or CD when using the
wired headphones.
The RSE is working
correctly. Use the wireless
headphones or have
the front seat passengers
listen to another audio
source.
3-87
DVD Display Error Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
DVD Distortion
There may be an experience with audio distortion
in the wireless headphones when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning
Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,
or walkie talkies.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar
®
System.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean
cloth and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard
or too long on the video screen.
3-88
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to select and
listen to any of the available radio sources: AM/FM,
XM, CD, or DVD. However, a rear seat passenger
cannot control a source selected on the radio by
someone in the front of the vehicle. For example,
the RSA cannot be used to change CD tracks if the
radio is set to CD. Also, if the radio is switched to
a source the RSA has control of, sound will not be
lost, but the RSA will lose control of that source.
Rear seat passengers always have control of the volume
for each set of headphones.
The RSA will run when the radio is off if the ignition
key is positioned in the power mode, see XXX in
this manual.
P(Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on
or off. The rear speakers are muted when the power
is turned on.
u(Volume): The left-hand knob controls the
headphone outlet on the left and the right-hand knob
controls the headphone outlet on the right. Turn
either knob clockwise to increase the volume and
counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
3-89
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select an audio
source: AM/FM, XM, CD, or DVD. The inactive CD,
or DVD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening. There are sources that are internal to the radio,
such as AM/FM, and CD and other sources to radio
that are external, such as XM™, DVD, and OnStar
®
.
If an external source has been selected, the rear
seat passengers cannot select a different external
source.
SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station or
CD track and stay there. The display will show the
selection. This function is inactive if the radio is set to
the same source.
To scan preset radio stations, press and hold the
SEEK button for two seconds and the radio will go
to the next preset station. Hold this button down and
the radio will continue to go through all available
preset stations. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to the radio.
When a CD is playing, press the SEEK button to go
to the next track on the CD. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player, press
and hold the SEEK button for two seconds to go you to
the next CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK
®
is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it does not operate and LOCKED displays.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK
®
is armed.
With THEFTLOCK
®
activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
3-90
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
uSEEK t: Press the forward or the back arrow
to go to the next or to the previous radio station and
stay there. The radio will only seek stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the forward or the back
arrow to fast forward or reverse.
g(OnStar
®
/Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar,
press this button to interact with the OnStar system.
See the OnStar
®
System on page 2-36 in this manual
for more information.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press this button
to mute the system. Press it again, or any other
radio button, to turn on the sound.
NXT (Next): Press this button to play a station you
have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs
are loaded.
+ SRC (Source): Press plus (+) or the minus ()
button to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2 (if equipped), or a CD. If a CD is loaded the
CD symbol will appear on the display.
+ VOL (Volume): Press the plus (+) or the () button
to increase or to decrease the volume.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static during normal
radio reception can occur if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug
the item from the accessory power outlet.
3-91
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or
hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio
may display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base. If tightening is required,
tighten by hand.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the
roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow
and ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
3-92
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3
Braking .........................................................4-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................4-5
StabiliTrak
®
System ........................................4-5
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .......................4-10
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-12
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-13
Driving at Night ............................................4-14
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-15
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-16
Winter Driving ..............................................4-17
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................4-21
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-22
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-22
Towing ..........................................................4-28
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-28
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-28
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System ....................................................4-28
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-30
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is
to wear your safety belt See Safety Belts: They Are
for Everyone on page 1-10.
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Drunk Driving
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious or
even fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
4-2
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking driver
or passenger is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
4-3
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on.
This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-35.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
4-4
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let antilock work for you. You might feel the
brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Your vehicle may have this feature. A limited-slip rear
axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice,
sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of
the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no
traction and the other does, this feature will allow the
wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
StabiliTrak
®
System
Your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak
®
, Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) which combines antilock
brake, traction and stability control systems and helps
the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle
in most driving conditions.
Traction control activates when the controller senses
wheel spin. StabiliTrak
®
will selectively apply the brakes
and reduce engine torque to help regain traction.
4-5
Stability control activates when the controller senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is travelling. StabiliTrak
®
selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to help guide the vehicle in the direction which
you are steering.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
insure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle. If driving
conditions delay system initialization, the STABILITRAK
NOT READY message may be displayed. If this is
the case, your vehicle does not need servicing.
For more information on the stability messages, see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-48.
When the StabiliTrak
®
system is both on and
actively controlling
the stability of the vehicle,
the StabiliTrak
®
light
will blink for the duration
of the event.
You may also feel or hear the system working.
This is normal.
The StabiliTrak
®
disable
button is located on the
transmission shift handle.
The StabiliTrak
®
system has three modes of operation:
STABILITRAK ON, TRACTION CONTROL OFF,
and STABILITRAK OFF.
STABILITRAK ON The vehicle will default to
STABILITRAK ON every time the driver starts the
vehicle. The StabiliTrak
®
light will be off and no DIC
messages will be displayed.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF The driver can modify
the engine speed management system by momentarily
pressing the StabiliTrak
®
button on the transmission
shift handle. The StabiliTrak
®
light will come on
and TRACTION CONTROL OFF will be displayed.
For vehicles without a DIC, the StabiliTrak
®
indicator
light will come on. Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak
®
button again will return the system to the STABILITRAK
ON mode.
4-6
STABILITRAK OFF The driver can turn off
StabiliTrak
®
by pressing the StabiliTrak
®
button for
more than five seconds. The StabiliTrak
®
light will come
on and STABILITRAK OFF will be displayed. For
vehicles without a DIC, the StabiliTrak
®
indicator light
will come on. Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak
®
button again will return the system to the STABILITRAK
ON mode. See StabiliTrak
®
Off below for more
information.
Traction Control Off
In this mode, stability control and brake-traction control
are functional. Engine speed management will be
modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely.
This can cause the brake-traction control to activate
more frequently. If the controller detects excessive wheel
spin in this mode, the StabiliTrak
®
indicator light may
blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be
displayed to warn the driver that damage may occur
to the transfer case.
StabiliTrak
®
Off
In this mode, both stability control and part of the
traction control system are disabled. Your vehicle will
still have brake-traction control, but will not be able
to use the engine speed management system. You may
still hear system noises as a result of the brake-traction
control coming on. If the controller detects excessive
wheel spin in this mode, the StabiliTrak
®
indicator light
may blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message
may be displayed to warn the driver that damage may
occur to the transfer case.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you may want to “rock” your vehicle
in an attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to
turn off the system when driving in extreme off-road
conditions where high wheel spin is required. See
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-21 for more information.
4-7
The following chart describes the StabiliTrak
®
system events and the corresponding messages and lights that will
be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.
Vehicles with a DIC Vehicles without a DIC Event
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator Light
DIC Message
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator Light
StabiliTrak
®
Service Light
Off None Off Off
StabiliTrak
®
On
mode (System is fully
enabled, but is not
actively controlling
vehicle stability).
Solid Traction Control Off Solid Off
Traction Control
Off Mode
Solid StabiliTrak
®
Off Solid Off
StabiliTrak
®
Off Mode
(StabiliTrak
®
indicator
light will flash when
system first enters
this mode).
Blinking StabiliTrak
®
Active Blinking Off
StabiliTrak
®
system
activates using
engine speed
management,
brake traction
control, and/or
stability control.
4-8
Vehicles with a DIC Vehicles without a DIC Event
Solid Service StabiliTrak
®
Solid Solid
StabiliTrak
®
system
is disabled due to a
system fault.
Solid
StabiliTrak
®
Not Ready
Solid Off
StabiliTrak
®
system
is disabled due to a
failure to initialize.
Notice: If the StabiliTrak
®
light comes on due to
heavy braking and/or because the traction control
system has been continuously active, do not
allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively.
If you do, you may be causing damage to the
transfer case. This could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak
®
, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights
and this message are displayed.
StabiliTrak
®
may activate on dry or rough roads or
under conditions such as heavy acceleration while
turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission.
When this happens, you may notice a reduction in
acceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.
This is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak
®
light will blink, and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When
road conditions allow, you may re-engage the cruise
control. See Cruise Control on page 3-11.
StabiliTrak
®
will turn off automatically if a problem is
detected in the system. The StabiliTrak
®
light will come
on and SERVICE STABILITRAK will be displayed on
the DIC. For vehicles without a DIC, the StabiliTrak
®
light and the StabiliTrak
®
service light will both come on.
If the SERVICE STABILITRAK message (or StabiliTrak
®
service light) does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-9
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
Your vehicle has this feature. There is no lever or
switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It is fully
automatic and adjusts as needed for road conditions.
Your vehicle has an active transfer case allowing
two-wheel-drive operation on dry roads. The transfer
case will shift automatically into all-wheel drive on
slippery surfaces. You may feel an extra shift when
the all-wheel drive engages.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface
makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path
when you turn the front wheels.
If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going
in the same direction. If you have ever tried to steer
a vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems steering and acceleration have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of
those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
4-10
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-3.
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel
to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
4-12
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance is longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide. You might not realize the surface
is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as enough water,
ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
Your vehicle does not have features like added ground
clearance, special underbody shielding, and a transfer
case low gear range, things that are necessary for
extended or severe off-road service. You should
not drive off-road unless you are on a level, solid
surface.
4-13
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
Drive defensively.
Do not drink and drive.
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean inside and out.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
4-14
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up
under your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-60.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Things to check on your own include:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have
up-to-date maps?
4-15
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Other driving tips include:
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Keep interior temperature cool.
Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
4-16
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
Top of hills: Be alert something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You might want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,
a red cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-60.
4-17
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to
be very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-18
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear
in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach,
such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to
brake while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-19
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-20
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the
engine again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour
or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-22.
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too
severe for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn
the traction system off and use the rocking method.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-82.
4-21
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction
or stability system. See StabiliTrak
®
System on
page 4-5. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear,
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels
in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause
a rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might need
to be towed out. If your vehicle does need to be
towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-28.
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the
Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-22
Tire and Loading Information Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label shows
the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B)
in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 5-60 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-67.
There is also important loading information on
the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Label Example
4-23
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-30 for
important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules and trailering tips.
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 1
4-24
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your
vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions.
The combined weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s
capacity weight.
Example 2 Example 3
4-25
Your vehicle has an electronically controlled air
suspension system that automatically keeps your
vehicle level as you load and unload your vehicle.
See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System on page 4-28 for additional information.
Certification/Tire Label
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label
shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires and
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle.
This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer
tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station
and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your
load equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle,
or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different
GVWRs and capacity weights. Please note
your vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consult
your dealer for additional details.
4-26
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your vehicle’s
weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you
load your vehicle the right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
4-27
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-4.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be
towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in this section.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two
of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
if any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled
air suspension system that automatically keeps your
vehicle level as you load and unload. The system
includes a compressor, two height sensors, and two air
springs supporting the rear axle.
The system also has an internal clock to prevent
overheating if the inflator is used for prolonged periods.
If the system overheats, all leveling function stops
until the system cools down. During this time, the
indicator light on the air inflator switch will be flashing.
4-28
The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate, in order
to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height after
loading. The system can lower the vehicle to the standard
ride height after unloading with the ignition on and also for
up to 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
You may hear the compressor operating when you load
your vehicle, and periodically as the system adjusts
the vehicle to the standard ride height.
Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator
hose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove the inflator
hose from the outlet during loading and unloading.
If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time,
some bleed down of the suspension is normal. Upon
starting the vehicle, proper height will be achieved.
Overload Protection
The air suspension system is equipped with overload
protection. Overload protection is designed to protect the
air suspension system, and it is an indicator to the
driver that the vehicle is overloaded. When the overload
protection mode is on, it will not allow damage to the
air compressor. However, do not overload the vehicle.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
If the suspension remains at a low height, the rear
axle load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating). When the overload protection mode is activated,
the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to
one minute without raising the vehicle depending on the
amount of overload. This will continue each time the
ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is reduced
below GAWR.
Indicator Light
The indicator light on the inflator switch in the rear
passenger compartment also serves as an indicator for
internal system error. If the indicator light is flashing
without the load leveling function or the inflator being
active, turn off the ignition. The next day turn on
the ignition and check the indicator light. The vehicle
can be driven with the light flashing, but if it is you
should have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
4-29
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only
if you have followed all the steps in this
section. Ask your dealer/retailer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer/retailer for more information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to
be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
4-30
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps
your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear
in at the heavier loads.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,
a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions).
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
The weight of the trailer,
The weight of the trailer tongue
And the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend on
any special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section
for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
4-31
Use the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. *GCWR
AWD (4.2 L L6 Engine) 3.73 5,600 lbs (2 540 kg) 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
AWD (5.3 L V8 Engine) 3.73 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
AWD (6.0 L V8 Engine) 4.10 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice,
or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your
vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-22 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
4-32
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up
to a maximum or 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight
carrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should
be 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight,
up to a maximum of 750 lbs (340 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get
them right simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the
vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce
your trailering capacity more than the total of the
additional weight.
4-33
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect
on the rear axle will be greater than just the weight itself,
as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,
but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle
is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider
the effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
4-34
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does
not exceed any of its ratings GCWR, GVWR,
RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight.
The only way to be sure you are not exceeding any
of these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22 for
more information. Then be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, including
the weight of the trailer tongue. If you use a weight
distributing hitch, make sure you don’t go over the
rear axle limit before you apply the weight distribution
spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
4-35
when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer will
weigh more than these limits. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains
may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and
do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave
just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes and they
must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able
to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak
®
, your
trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic
brake system.
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-31. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Keep the rear-most windows closed.
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-20.
4-36
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connection, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
4-37
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the
trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not.
It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you
start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear, under heavy
loads or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do
get the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-30.
4-38
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with
a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and
the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your
wheels away from the curb. When parking
downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
start your engine,
shift into a gear, and
release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for
more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid
(don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt(s),
cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you
find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea
to review these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
4-39
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with a seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness has a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector (if equipped with the
trailering package) that is attached to a bracket on
the hitch platform. If your vehicle is not equipped with
the heavy-duty trailer connector, you can purchase
one from your Saab dealer.
The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Running Lamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
Red: Battery Feed (The chassis wiring ring terminal
must be fastened to a stud on the underhood
electrical center before the trailer feed will
become active.)
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector
is available from your dealer.
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,
turn on the headlamps to boost the vehicle system
voltage and properly charge the battery.
Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an
electric trailer brake controller. These wires are
located inside the vehicle on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel. These wires should be connected
to an electric trailer brake controller by your dealer or
a qualified service center.
4-40
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle ...5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-18
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-22
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-24
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-25
Engine Coolant .............................................5-28
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-30
Engine Overheating .......................................5-30
Cooling System ............................................5-32
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-37
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-38
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-39
Brakes ........................................................5-40
Battery ........................................................5-43
Jump Starting ...............................................5-44
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-49
Rear Axle .......................................................5-50
Front Axle ......................................................5-51
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-52
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-52
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-52
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-53
Headlamps ..................................................5-53
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ..........................................5-54
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...................5-55
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-56
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-57
Windshield Replacement .................................5-57
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-57
Tires ..............................................................5-60
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-62
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-64
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-67
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
5-1
High-Speed Operation ...................................5-68
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-70
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-71
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-75
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-76
Buying New Tires .........................................5-77
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-79
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-79
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-81
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-81
Tire Chains ..................................................5-82
Accessory Inflator .........................................5-83
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-85
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-86
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-87
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ..........................................5-90
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-94
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-98
Spare Tire .................................................5-101
Appearance Care ..........................................5-101
Interior Cleaning .........................................5-101
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-103
Leather ......................................................5-103
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .......................................5-104
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-104
Weatherstrips .............................................5-104
Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-105
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-105
Finish Care ................................................5-106
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .......5-106
Aluminum Wheels .......................................5-107
Tires .........................................................5-107
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-108
Finish Damage ...........................................5-108
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-108
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-108
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-109
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-110
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-110
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-110
Electrical System ..........................................5-111
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-111
Headlamps .................................................5-111
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-111
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-112
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-112
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-112
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..........................5-119
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-122
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Service
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
Accessories and Modifications
When you add non-dealer/non-retailer accessories to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.
Some of these accessories may even cause malfunction
or damage not covered by warranty.
Saab accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your Saab
dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
Saab accessories. When you go to your Saab dealer
and ask for Saab accessories, you will know that
Saab-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine Saab accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-66.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may
be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle
than this manual can.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This can cause
wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
5-4
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,
the engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some
gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). We recommend against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6
for additional information.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-38. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by your warranty.
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for
low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT
can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
5-6
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries
to you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-7
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-105.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-38.
There may also be a light that comes on in the
instrument panel to let you know if your gas cap is
not properly installed. See Check Gas Cap Light
on page 3-44 for more information.
5-8
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-38.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if
this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
1. To open the hood,
first pull the handle
with this symbol on it.
It is located inside the
vehicle under the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side.
5-10
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood latch up and to the right to
release it, then lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat
the process if necessary.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 4.2L L6 engine, here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-24.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-32.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-38.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-25.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-30.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
I. Remote Negative () Terminal (Marked GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-44.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-40.
K. Battery. See Battery on page 5-43.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-112.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-32.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-24.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-25.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-30.
H. Remote Negative () Terminal (Marked GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-44.
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-38.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-40.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-112.
L. Battery. See Battery on page 5-43.
5-15
When you open the hood on the 6.0L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-16
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-32.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-24.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Under Engine Cover).
See “When to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
Oil on page 5-18.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
F. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick.
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-25.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-30.
H. Remote Negative () Terminal (Marked GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-44.
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-38.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-40.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-112.
L. Battery. See Battery on page 5-43.
5-17
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the L mark for the L6 engine or
the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick
for the V8 engine, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area (F) that shows the proper
operating range for the L6 engine or above the
cross-hatched area for the V8 engine, the engine
could be damaged.
L6 Engine
V8 Engine
5-18
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
6.0L V8 (VIN Code H) Engine Only
Remove the engine cover to access the engine
oil fill cap:
1. Remove the screw in the center of the cover.
2. Remove the cover from the stud on the driver side.
3. Pull the cover up and off the bracket.
4. Reverse the steps to reinstall.
Except 6.0L V8
(VIN Code H) Engine
6.0L V8 (VIN Code H)
Engine
5-19
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Except Vehicles with 6.0L V8 (VIN Code H)
Engine
Look for three things:
GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below 20°F (29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
5-20
For 6.0L V8 (VIN Code H) Engine
Vehicles Only
Look for three things:
GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. Look for and
use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this on the oil container, and use only those oils
that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM4718M
and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil
container.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1
®
synthetic oil, which meets all requirements
for your vehicle.
5-21
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all
you need for good performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-48. Change the oil as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work and
reset the system. It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-22
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL message being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the Engine Oil Life System:
1. Use the fuel button on the Driver Information Center
to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen.
2. Press and hold the select button on the Driver
Information Center five seconds while ENGINE
OIL LIFE is displayed.
3. OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display for 10 seconds
to let you know the system is reset.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer,
a service station, or a local recycling center for help.
5-23
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-3 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Remove the screws on the engine air cleaner/filter
and lift off the cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
4.2L L6 Engine shown,
5.3L and 6.0L V8
Engines similar
5-24
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air cleaner/
filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-25
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if
you check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check
the fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
5-26
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Flip the handle up and then remove the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
The automatic transmission
dipstick handle with this
symbol on it is located in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
2. Reinstall it back in all the way, wait three seconds
and then pull it back out again. If the dipstick does
not go down the tube easily, turn the blade and
try again until it is fully inserted in the tube.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or
in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, reinstall
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If
inconsistent readings persist, contact your dealer/retailer.
5-27
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL
®
engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL
®
extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-30.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL
®
coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to 34°F (37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL
®
may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL
®
(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-28
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL
®
coolant. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant
recovery tank is in the
engine compartment on
the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. The cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher.
5-29
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you
will almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-32.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-36 for more information.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the display will show an Engine Coolant Hot/Engine
Overheated message. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-48 for more information.
5-30
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of
the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-31
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
Do not do anything if the engine coolant is boiling. Wait
until it cools down. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
5.3L V8 Engine shown,
4.2L L6 and 6.0L V8 Engines similar
5-32
The coolant level should
be at least up to the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when
idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL
®
may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL
®
(silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-28 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
5-34
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.
5-35
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-28 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-36
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages so
you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal
and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping
or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system
functioning properly. The fan will slow down when
additional cooling is not required and the clutch
disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
5-37
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
For vehicles with the 4.2L L6 engine, the level should
be at the C (Cold) mark. For vehicles with the 5.3L or
6.0L V8 engines, the level should be at the FULL mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-38
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Notice:
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-39
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, you
should have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since
a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not
work well.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-3.
5-40
Checking Brake Fluid
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the
cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN, but not over
the MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-105.
5-41
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are
needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the
time your vehicle is moving, except when you are pushing
on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications
in Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, the disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change for
the worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
5-42
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it
is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-44
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative () cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative () cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
5-43
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. If you
have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer
case is not in NEUTRAL.
5-44
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets, if equipped.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help to save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative () terminals on each
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative () jump
starting terminal. You should always use this remote
terminal instead of the terminal on the battery.
The remote negative () terminal is located on
the front engine lift bracket on vehicles with the
4.2L L6 engine or the engine accessory drive bracket
for vehicles with the 5.3L or 6.0L V8 engines, and is
marked GND (Ground). See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on
location.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-45
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will
go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative () will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative () terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not
connect positive (+) to negative () or you will get
a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts too. And do not connect the negative ()
cable to the negative () terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to
the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-46
8. Now connect the black negative () cable to the
negative () terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative () cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative () terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative ()
terminal, marked GND, for this purpose.
The remote negative () terminal is located on
the front engine lift bracket for the 4.2L L6 engine,
and on the accessory drive bracket for the 5.3L
or 6.0L V8 engines.
9. Connect the other end of the negative () cable to
the remote negative () terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine shown,
6.0L V8 Engine
similar
5-47
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative () Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative () Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
5-48
All-Wheel Drive
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate
reading, the vehicle should
be on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-49
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
For all vehicles, excluding vehicles equipped with the
6.0L V8 Engine, the proper level is from 0 to 0.40 inch
(0 to 10 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle.
For vehicles equipped with the 6.0L V8 Engine, the
proper level is from 0.6 inch to 1.6 inches (15 mm to
40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located
on the rear axle differential cover.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
For vehicles equipped with the SS package, to add
lubricant when the level is low, use SAE 75W–90
Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) meeting GM Specification 9986115.
To completely refill after draining, add 5.5 ounces
(163 ml) of Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in Canada 992694).
Then fill to the bottom of the filler plug hole with the
Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
5-50
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 0.50 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-51
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs,
see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-57.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
service them.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s
HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
5-52
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-10
2. Lift the two headlamp retaining clips to release
the headlamp assembly from the vehicle.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle
to access the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the bulb cover for the high beam (A) and
low beam (B) bulbs.
5-53
5. Remove the bulb socket that needs to be replaced
by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector from the
old bulb.
7. Plug the electrical connector into the new bulb using
care not to touch the glass with your fingers.
8. Install the new bulb socket and turn it clockwise to
secure.
9. Reinstall the bulb covers.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall.
11. Press down on the retaining clips to secure the
headlamp assembly.
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 3 under Headlamps on
page 5-53 to access the front turn signal,
sidemarker or parking lamp.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp assembly.
3. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb to release it
from the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
5. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to secure.
6. Reinstall the headlamp assembly by lining up the
headlamp assembly with the slots in the headlamp
retaining clips.
7. Press down on the headlamp retaining clips to
secure the headlamp assembly.
5-54
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
A. Back-up Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass on
page 2-12 for more information.
2. Remove the screws
from the taillamp
assembly.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
5-55
5. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release it from
the socket.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by lining up the
locator pins with the retainers in the body of the
vehicle.
9. Reinstall the two screws and tighten.
10. Close the liftgate.
License Plate Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the license plate
lamp lens.
2. Pull the lens away from the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Replace the lamp assembly lens and tighten the
screws.
5-56
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamp 921
Front Parking, Turn Signal Lamp 5702 NAK
Front/Rear Sidemarker 194
License Plate Lamp W5W
Halogen Headlamps
High-Beam 9005
Low-Beam (Halogen Only) H11
Rear Turn Signal 3757 AK
Stoplamp and Taillamp 3157
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with an acoustic windshield.
If you ever have to have your windshield replaced
be sure to get an acoustic windshield so you will
continue to have the benefits an acoustic windshield
can provide.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-3.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
5-57
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.
The insert has two notches at one end that are
locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly.
At the notched end, pull the insert from the
blade assembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
5-58
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.
Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the
park rest position.
2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so care should be used
when pulling it away from the vehicle.
3. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, and pull it off of
the wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in position and
push the blade away from the wiper arm.
5-59
4. Replace the wiper blade.
5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest
position.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet
for details.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-60
CAUTION: (Continued)
Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-67.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if
your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 5-68
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These
tires are designed for very responsive driving on
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. Your vehicle
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes, and other road hazards.
5-61
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustration is an example
of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size
: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification)
: Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation)
:
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
: The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material
: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
: Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information,
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-79.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
5-62
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width
: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio
: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the passenger (P-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code
: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter
: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description
: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
5-63
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight
: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio
: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt
: A rubber coated layer of cords that
is located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Bead
: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire
: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure
: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-67.
Curb Weight
: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings
: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR
: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
GAWR FRT
: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-22.
GAWR RR
: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
5-64
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa)
: The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index
: An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure
: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating
: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight
: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight
: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22.
Occupant Distribution
: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall
: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure
: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Radial Ply Tire
: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim
: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall
: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
5-65
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction
: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators
: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 5-76.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards)
: A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-79.
Vehicle Capacity Weight
: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire
: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard
: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22.
5-66
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-22. How you load your
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
tire. See Spare Tire on page 5-101 for additional
information.
5-67
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
5-68
If your vehicle has P255/55R18 size tires installed
on the rear axle, they will require inflation pressure
adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds above
99 mph (160 km/h). Set the cold inflation pressure, for the
rear tires only, to the maximum inflation pressure shown
on the tire sidewall, or 36 psi (248 kPa), whichever is
lower. See the example following. When you end this
high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold tire inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the rim
flange. It will read something like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high-speed driving at 36 psi (248 kPa).
The inflation pressure for the front tires should be set to
the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires installed on the
rear axle, they will require inflation pressure adjustment
when driving your vehicle at speeds above 99 mph
(160 km/h). Set the cold inflation pressure, for the rear
tires only, to the maximum inflation pressure shown
on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (262 kPa), whichever is
lower. See the example following. When you end this
high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold tire inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (262 kPa).
The inflation pressure for the front tires should be set to
the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Racing or other competitive driving may affect the
warranty coverage of your vehicle. See your warranty
booklet for more information.
5-69
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-71,
for additional information.
5-70
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210
of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a low tire
pressure condition exists. Tire pressure levels may also
be checked using the Driver Information Center (DIC)
steering wheel control buttons. See “Tire Pressures”
under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-45.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS will illuminate the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
instrument panel cluster.
5-71
At the same time a message to check the pressure
in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. For additional information and details about
the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-45 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-48.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-67. For the location of the Tire and
Loading Information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-67.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-75 and Tires on page 5-60.
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved
tire sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
5-72
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When
the system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning
light flashes for about one minute and then stays
on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and
DIC message to come on are:
One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-77.
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
5-73
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes will
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire
using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated
on the tire’s sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you will need to start over.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Turn the headlamp control from off to parking lamps
four times within three seconds. A double horn chirp
will sound and the TPMS low tire warning light will
begin to flash. The double horn chirp and flashing
TPMS warning light indicate that the TPMS matching
process has started. The TPMS warning light should
continue flashing throughout the matching
procedure.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
then stop and listen for a single horn chirp. The
single horn chirp should sound within 15 seconds,
confirming that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position. If you
do not hear the confirming single horn chirp, you will
need to start over with step number one.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
5-74
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
driver’s side rear tire, check to see if the TPMS
warning light is still flashing. If yes, turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF to exit the sensor matching
process. If the TPMS warning light is not flashing,
the five minute time limit has passed and you
will need to start the process over beginning with
Step 1.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-76 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-3.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that your vehicle continues to
perform most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-76 and Wheel
Replacement on page 5-81.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-71.
5-75
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.
If it moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat
or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-98.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
of tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
5-76
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear
out before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC spec number will
be followed by a MS, for mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 5-62 for additional
information.
5-77
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle performing most like
it did when the tires were new. Replacing less
than a full set of tires can affect the braking
and handling performance of your vehicle.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-75
for information on proper tire rotation.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installed on
your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a
low-pressure warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would get with TPC
Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-70.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
5-78
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes, rollover airbags,
traction control; and stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will crash
and suffer serious injury. Only use Saab
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a Saab certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-77 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or, to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available may vary with respect to
these grades, they must also conform to federal
safety requirements.
5-79
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning
: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning
: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
5-80
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86 for more
information.
5-81
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new original equipment
wheel.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the rear
tires.
5-82
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle has an accessory inflator system. It can
also inflate things like basketballs and bicycle tires.
It can also used to inflate the tires to the proper
tire pressure. It is not designed to inflate large objects
which will require more than five minutes to inflate, such
as an air mattress.
The accessory inflator
is located in the rear
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle,
behind an access cover,
and near the liftgate
opening.
To access the inflator, push in on the tab to remove
the cover.
You may also have an air inflator kit that is located
in the rear floor storage compartment. It includes a
22 ft (6.7 m) hose with three nozzle adapters.
To use the accessory inflator, do the following:
1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end of
the hose if required.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate any object only to its recommended
pressure.
2. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish
to inflate.
3. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
5-83
4. Press and release the switch to turn the air inflator
on. The indicator light will remain on when the
inflator is running.
The system has an internal clock to prevent the
system from overheating. The system will allow
about five minutes of running time, then the
compressor will stop. The indicator light will
then begin to flash. When the indicator is off,
the inflator can be started again by pressing the
switch. If the compressor is still hot, it may only
run for a short time before shutting off again.
5. Press and release the switch to turn the inflator off.
Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch and store it in
its proper location. Remove the inflator hose from the
outlet during loading and unloading. Load leveling will
not function with the inflator hose attached to the inflator
outlet. See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System on page 4-28 for more information.
To reinstall the cover, line up the tabs at the back of the
cover, put it in place and latch the tabs.
If the indicator light on the accessory inflator flashes
continuously, it could indicate that there is a malfunction
in the air suspension system. See Electronically
Controlled Air Suspension System on page 4-28
for more information.
5-84
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-85
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 3-6 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
5-86
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use this as a guide to
assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you will need is stored under
the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See
Rear Seat Operation on page 1-8 for more information.
To release the jack from its holder, turn the knob on the
jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head.
5-87
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A),
wheel blocks (B), extension(s), (socket end) (C),
handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E).
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Up)
The following instructions explain how to remove the
underbody-mounted spare located underneath your
vehicle.
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to
the storage position under the vehicle while it is
supported by a jack, you could damage the tire
and/or your vehicle. Always remove or restow a
tire when the vehicle is on the ground.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass on
page 2-12 for more information.
2. Attach the wheel wrench (A) to the extension (C).
3. Insert the socket end of the extension (C) on a
45 degree angle downward into the hoist drive
shaft hole. It is exposed when the rear gate is
open and is just above the rear bumper.
Be sure the socket end of the extension (C)
connects to the hoist shaft (B).
5-88
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until
the spare tire can be pulled out from under the
vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not to lower. See Secondary Latch System
on page 5-94 for more information.
5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when the
tire has been completely lowered, and pull it
through the wheel opening.
6. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-89
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-86 for more information.
2. Use the flat end of the wheel wrench to carefully
pry off the center cap.
3. Using the wheel
wrench, loosen all the
wheel nuts by turning
the nuts one turn
counterclockwise.
Do not remove
them yet.
4. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to
raise the jack lift head.
5. Place the handle, extension, and wheel wrench
onto the jack.
A. Front Frame/Rear Axle
B. Jack
C. Handle
D. Extension(s)
E. Wheel Wrench
6. Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest
the flat tire.
Front Position Rear Position
5-90
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to fit.
5-91
8. Remove all the wheel
nuts and the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-86.
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
10. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
5-92
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
11. Put the nuts on by hand. Make sure the cone
shaped end is toward the wheel.
12. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub. If a nut cannot be turned by
hand, use the wheel wrench and see your dealer
as soon as possible.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-93
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-122 for wheel
nut torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-122 for the wheel
nut torque specification.
14. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is
damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must
be stored with the valve stem pointing up. See Storing
a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-98 for
instructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
5-94
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed next.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the under spare.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable is visible. If it is
not visible, proceed
to Step 6.
2. If visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or
feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 2 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on
page 5-87.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
5-95
6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and the wheel
wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle
towards the front of the rear bumper. Position
the center lift point of the jack under the center
of the spare tire.
7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place.
The secondary latch has released and the spare
tire is balancing on the jack.
9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
11. If the spare tire is
hanging from the cable,
insert the socket end of
the extension into the
hoist shaft hole on a
45 degree angle
downward.
12. Be sure that the socket end of the extension
connects to the hoist shaft.
5-96
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare the rest of the way.
13. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
14. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable
back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
5-97
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing up. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing
downward, its secondary latch will not work
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
properly and the spare tire could loosen
and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
happened when your vehicle was being driven,
the tire might contact a person or another
vehicle, causing injury and, of course,
damage to itself as well. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare tire is stored
with its valve stem pointing up.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the hoist.
However, storing it that way for an extended period
could damage the wheel. To avoid this, always stow
the wheel properly with the valve stem pointing up
and have the wheel repaired as soon as possible.
5-98
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted flat
or spare tire.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Up)
1. Put the tire (E) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Remove the hubcap, if the vehicle has one, from
the flat tire by tapping the backside of the hubcap
with the wheel wrench (A). Store in a safe location
until the flat tire is repaired. Once the tire is
repaired, replace the hubcap.
3. Make sure the valve stem is pointed up and to
the rear.
4. Pull the retainer (D) through the wheel.
5. Put the socket end of the extension (C) through the
hole just above the rear bumper at a 45 degree
angle downward. Connect the socket end of
the extension to the hoist shaft (B).
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench (A)
clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip
twice. This indicates that the tire is secure and
the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be
overtightened.
5-99
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench and socket end of the
extension to tighten the cable.
8. Return the equipment to the proper location in the
vehicle as shown next.
A. Handle
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Instruction Label
D. Extension(s)
E. Knob
F. Wheel Blocks
and Jack
1. Attach the handle (A), wheel wrench (B), and
extension (D) in the slots provided.
2. Roll up the instruction label (C) and return to the
slot in the tool kit.
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (F) to the jack.
4. Turn the knob (E) on the jack clockwise to raise the
jack head.
5. Return the rear seat to its proper position.
5-100
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation
pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22 for
information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-90 and Storing a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-98.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle.
This way, a spare tire will be available in case you need
it again. Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its
wheel together.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
5-101
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-102
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the
locally cleaned area gives any impression that a
ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
5-103
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the appearance and feel
of your interior and are not recommended. Do not use
silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-104
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that
can damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use
it on your vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-109. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-105.
5-105
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-109.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with
glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you
clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of
vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-106
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
the surface could be damaged. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-107
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Saab
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-108
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
5-109
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-122 for your vehicle’s
engine code.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-110
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as they
should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.
Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one for each
headlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical overload will
cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens, have your
headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
5-111
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without like the radio or
cigarette lighter and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located in
the engine compartment, on the passenger side of
the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
5-112
Fuses Usage
1
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension
2
Passenger Side Headlamp
High-Beam
Fuses Usage
3
Passenger Side Headlamp
Low-Beam
4 Trailer Back-Up
4.2L L6 Engine
5-113
Fuses Usage
5 Driver Side Headlamp High-Beam
6 Driver Side Headlamp Low-Beam
7 Windshield Wiper
8 Automatic Transfer Case
9 Windshield Washer
10 Powertrain Control Module B
11 Fog Lamps
12 Stoplamp
13 Cigarette Lighter
15 Electric Adjustable Pedals
16 Ignition B
18 Airbag System
19 Electric Brake
20 Cooling Fan
21 Horn
22 Ignition E
23 Electronic Throttle Control
Fuses Usage
24
Instrument Panel Cluster/Driver
Information Center (DIC)
25 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
26
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Canister
27 Backup
28 Powertrain Control Module 1
29 Oxygen Sensor
30 Air Conditioning
31 Truck Body Controller 1
50 Passenger Side Trailer Turn
51 Driver Side Trailer Turn
52 Hazard Flashers
53 Headlamp Driver Module
54 Air Injection Reactor Solenoid
57 Ignition A1
59 Regulated Voltage Control
5-114
J-Case Fuses Usage
14 Trailer Stoplamp/Turn Signal
32 Trailer
33 Antilock Brake System
34 Ignition A
35 Driver Side Headlamp
36 Blower Motor
56 Air Pump
58 Passenger Side Headlamp
62
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System (StabiliTrak
®
)
Relays Usage
37 Headlamp Washer
38 Rear Windshield Wiper/Washer
39 Fog Lamps
40 Horn
41 Fuel Pump
Relays Usage
42 Windshield Washer
43 High-Beam Headlamp
44 Air Conditioning
45 Cooling Fan
46 Headlamp Driver Module
47 Starter
49 Electric Adjustable Pedals
55 Air Injection Reactor Solenoid
59 Low-Beam Headlamp
60 Ignition 1
61 Powertrain
62
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System (StabiliTrak
®
)
Misc. Usage
48 Instrument Panel Battery
5-115
Fuses Usage
1
Electrically Controlled Air
Suspension
2
Passenger Side Headlamp
High-Beam
Fuses Usage
3
Passenger Side Headlamp
Low-Beam
4 Trailer Back-Up
5.3L V8 and 6.0L V8 Engine
5-116
Fuses Usage
5 Driver Side Headlamp High-Beam
6 Driver Side Headlamp Low-Beam
7 Windshield Wiper
8 Automatic Transfer Case
9 Windshield Washer
10 Powertrain Control Module B
11 Fog Lamps
12 Stoplamp
13 Cigarette Lighter
14 Ignition Coils
15
Transmission Control
Module/Canister
16 Ignition B
18 Airbag System
19 Electric Brake
Fuses Usage
20 Cooling Fan
21 Horn
22 Ignition E
23 Electronic Throttle Control
24
Instrument Panel Cluster/Driver
Information Center
25 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
26 Engine 1
27 Backup
28 Engine Control Module 1
29 Engine Control Module
30 Air Conditioning
31 Injector Bank A
50 Passenger Side Trailer Turn
51 Driver Side Trailer Turn
5-117
Fuses Usage
52 Hazard Flashers
53 Transmission
54 Oxygen Sensor B
55 Oxygen Sensor A
56 Injector Bank B
57 Headlamp Driver Module
58 Truck Body Controller 1
59 Electric Adjustable Pedals
61 Ignition A1
66 Regulated Voltage Control
J-Case Fuses Usage
17 Trailer Turn Signal, Stoplamps
32 Trailer
33 Antilock Brake System
J-Case Fuses Usage
34 Ignition A
35 Blower Motor
36 Driver Side Headlamp
62 Passenger Side Headlamp
65
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System (StabiliTrak
®
)
Relays Usage
37 Headlamp Washer
38 Rear Wiper
39 Fog Lamps
40 Horn
41 Fuel Pump
42 Windshield Washer
43 High-Beam Headlamp
5-118
Relays Usage
44 Air Conditioning
45 Cooling Fan
46 Headlamp Driver Module
47 Starter
49 Electric Adjustable Pedals
60 Powertrain
63 Low-Beam Headlamp
64 Ignition 1
Misc. Usage
48 Instrument Panel Battery
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear underseat fuse block is located on the driver
side of the vehicle, under the second row seat. Pull the
seat cushion forward to access the fuse block.
5-119
Fuses Usage
01 Passenger Door Control Module
02 Driver Door Control Module
03 Liftgate Module 2
04 Truck Body Controller 3
05 Blank
06 Blank
07 Truck Body Controller 2
08 Power Seats
09 Rear Wiper
10 Driver Door Module
11 Amplifier
12 Passenger Door Module
13 Blank
14 Driver Side Rear Parking Lamps
15 Blank
16
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
17
Passenger Side Rear Parking
Lamps
18 Locks
19 Liftgate Module/Driver Seat Module
5-120
Fuses Usage
20 Blank
21 Locks
23 Blank
24 Unlock
25 Ignition 0
26 Overhead Battery/OnStar
®
System
27 Rainsense™ Wipers
28 Sunroof
29 Accessory
30 Parking Lamps
31 Truck Body Controller Accessory
32 Truck Body Controller 5
33 Front Wipers
34 Ignition 3
35 Vehicle Stop
36 Transmission Control Module
37 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning B
Fuses Usage
38 Front Parking Lamps
39 Rear Left Turn Signal
40 Heat, Ventilation, Air Conditioning 1
41 Front Right Turn Signal
42 Radio
43 Trailer Park
44 Rear Right Turn Signal
45 Blank
46 Auxiliary Power 1
47 Blank
48 Ignition 0
49 Not Used
50 Blank
51 Front Left Turn Signal
52 Brakes
53 Truck Body Controller 4
5-121
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Application
Capacities
English Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
For the air conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution
label located under the hood. See your dealer
for more information.
Cooling System
4.2L L6 Engine 9.7 qt 9.2 L
5.3L V8 Engine 11.2 qt 10.6 L
6.0L V8 Engine 11.2 qt 10.6 L
Engine Oil with Filter
4.2L L6 Engine 7.0 qt 6.6 L
5.3L V8 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L
6.0L V8 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L
5-122
Application
Capacities
English Metric
Fuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 L
AWD Transfer Case Lubricant 2.0 qt 1.8 L
Transmission (Drain and Refill) 5.0 qt 4.7 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4.2L L6 S Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5.3L V8 M Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
6.0L V8 H Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
5-123
NOTES
5-124
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-3
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15
Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a
few times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work,
to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
6-2
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-3
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your dealer/
retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message comes
on, it means that service is required for your vehicle.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-48. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
6-3
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-22 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-18. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-22. An Emission Control
Service.
••
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). ••
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-24. See footnote (k).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-75 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 6-9.
••
6-4
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). ••
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
••
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
••
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. See footnote (g).
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•••
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•••
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-24.
•••
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service).
See footnotes (g) and (h).
•••
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (normal service).
See footnote (g).
Automatic transfer case only: Change
transfer case fluid. See footnote (g).
•••
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
V8 engine only: Inspect spark plug
wires. An Emission Control Service.
6-6
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-57 and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades on page 5-106 for more information.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 1-68.
6-7
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot
points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate
handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo
door hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to
a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease
on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) Inspect hoses for cracks, chafing, leaks, kinks,
and proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-28
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
6-8
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-18.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-28.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-67. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-75.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-28.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-28.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately
if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-10
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
(Except
6.0L V8
Engine)
Engine oil which meets
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine
the proper viscosity for your
vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil
on page 5-18.
Engine Oil
(6.0L V8
Engine Only)
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard can be identified
as synthetic, and should also
be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
API oils with the starburst symbol
will meet this standard. Look for and
use only an oil that meets Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
see Engine Oil on page 5-18.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL
®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-28.
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco
®
Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Windshield Washer Solvent.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
Power Steering Fluid
(Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON
®
-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
specifications.
6-12
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
specifications. With a complete drain
and refill add 4 ounces (118 ml)
of Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant
Additive (Part No. U.S. 1052358,
in Canada 992694) where required.
See Rear Axle on page 5-50.
Transfer Case
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
(Part No. U.S. 12378508,
in Canada 10953626).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and Release
Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate
Hinge and
Linkage,
Folding Seats,
and Fuel
Door Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube (Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube (Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
6-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part Part Number ACDelco
®
Part Number
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24208576 TF337
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15036141 A2014C
Engine Oil Filter
4.2L L6 89017342 PF61
5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
4.2L L6 12598004 41-103
5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 12571164 41-985
Wiper Blades
Front 22 inches (56 cm) 15214346
Rear 13 inches (33 cm) 15232655
6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing
4.2L V6 Engine
5.3L V8 and 6.0L V8 Engines
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-16
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-18
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-4
Scheduling Service Appointments .....................7-7
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Collision Damage Repair .................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab ...................7-12
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-13
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-14
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-14
OnStar
®
......................................................7-15
Navigation System ........................................7-15
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-15
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Saab. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Saab Customer Assistance Center, in the U.S.,
by calling 1-800-955-9007. In Canada, contact Saab
Customer Assistance Centre by calling 1-800-263-1999
(English and French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Your name, address and daytime phone number.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
The name of the selling dealership and location.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
Nature and details of the problem you are
experiencing.
When contacting Saab, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
If after contacting the Saab Customer Assistance Center
your concern has not been resolved, please refer to
the “Dispute Resolution Process” found in your Saab
Consumer’s Guide.
7-2
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saab
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can be
found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
Get e-mail service reminders.
Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
Find Saab dealers for service nationwide.
Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.saabusa.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater
ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Saab has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Saab by dialing: 1-866-612-0380. (TTY users in Canada
can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Saab encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Saab, refer to the addresses below.
United States Customer Assistance
Saab Customer Assistance Center
Saab Cars USA, Inc.
4405-A International Boulevard
Norcross, GA 30093
www.Saab.com
1-800-955-9007
1-866-612-0380 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-852-9001
Canada Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada, Limited
Customer Assistance Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999 (English and French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call
1-800-852–9001.
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Saab vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saab Roadside Assistance
program.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
7-4
Services Provided
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and in Canada only, up to
a maximum coverage of $100. These services are
provided at a nominal charge if the vehicle is no longer
within the Powertrain warranty.
Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, service to
provide diesel may be restricted. For safety reasons,
propane and other alternative fuels will not be
provided through this service.
Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar
®
subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling crash. Winch-out assistance is
provided when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud,
or snow.
Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Jump Start: A battery jump start will be covered at
no charge if the vehicle does not start.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: In the
event of a warranty related vehicle disablement,
while en route and over 100 miles, for U.S.
customers, and 250 kilometres, for Canadian
customers, from the original point of departure, you
may qualify for trip interruption expense assistance.
This assistance covers reasonable reimbursement of
up to a maximum of $1000 for U.S. customers, and
$500 for Canadian customers, to assist you with
some of the unplanned expense incurred within three
days of the disablement you may incur while waiting
for your vehicle to be repaired. Original detailed
receipts and a copy of the repair order are required.
In Canada, pre-authorization is also required.
Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Roadside
Assistance will send you detailed, computer
personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either
the most direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along with
helpful travel information pertaining to your trip.
7-5
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. In Canada, trip routing requests will
be limited to six per calendar year.
Alternative Service (Canada only) There may be
times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor not covered by
warranty are the responsibility of the vehicle owner
or driver.
Saab and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner
or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
Calling For Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Telephone number of your location
Location of the vehicle
Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
Description of the problem
7-6
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Saab and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to make any changes or discontinue the
Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same
day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
7-7
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saab helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by Saab for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
7-8
Saab reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
terms and conditions described herein at its sole
discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine Saab Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine Saab Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine
Saab parts can help maintain your Saab New Vehicle
Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment Saab
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your Saab
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than Saab and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your Saab New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
Saab also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your Saab dealer may have a
collision repair center with Saab-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has Saab-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
7-9
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your Saab vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
Saab vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with Saab
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine Saab Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do
not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of
mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
If you need roadside assistance, call Saab Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-4 for more information.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-10
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a Saab dealer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
Saab recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine Saab parts or recycled original Saab parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
Saab vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine Saab parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
Saab parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
7-11
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in
addition to notifying Saab.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer/retailer, or General
Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify Saab.
Call 1-800-955-9007, or write:
Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Saab Customer Assistance Center
4405-A International Boulevard
Norcross, GA 30093
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999 (English or French),
or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-12
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service Saab cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model Saab 9-7x vehicles. To
request an order form, please specify year and model
name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern
Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-13
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your Saab vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer technician service your
vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how
you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption
or average speed. These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets,
seat positions, and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
How fast the vehicle was traveling
7-14
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Saab will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that Saab collects or receives may also be used for
Saab research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
OnStar
®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
use. See also OnStar
®
System on page 2-36 in this
manual for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in Saab vehicles does
not use or record personal information or link with any
other Saab system containing personal information.
7-15
NOTES
7-16
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-66
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-111
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-23
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-24
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-20
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-31
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-30
Airbag System ................................................ 1-52
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-57
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-55
Airbag Systems
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-66
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-59
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-61
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-66
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-59
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-49
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ......................... 4-10
All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ............................ 3-42
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-92
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ...................................................... 3-92
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-35
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-107
Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-104
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-108
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-105
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-103
Finish Care ............................................... 5-106
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-108
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-104
Interior Cleaning ........................................ 5-101
Leather .................................................... 5-103
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-108
Tires ........................................................ 5-107
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-108
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-109
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-105
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-104
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-106
Appointments, Scheduling Service ....................... 7-7
Audio System ................................................. 3-60
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-91
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-92
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual .............................. 3-76
Radio Reception .......................................... 3-91
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................ 3-89
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-60
1
Audio System (cont.)
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-90
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-92
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-61
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-16
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-25
Operation ................................................... 2-25
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-43
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-18
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5
Brakes .......................................................... 5-40
System Warning Light .................................. 3-34
Braking ........................................................... 4-3
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-19
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-54
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-53
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-52
Headlamps ................................................. 5-53
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-52
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-56
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-57
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ................. 5-55
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-77
C
Calibration ..................................................... 2-33
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-122
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-12, 2-31, 4-17, 4-30
Care of
Safety Belts .............................................. 5-104
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-47
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-48
CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-71
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-45
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-82
Charging System Light .................................... 3-33
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-38
Gages Warning Light ................................... 3-43
Check Gas Cap Light ...................................... 3-44
2
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-108
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-35
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-32
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-39
Older Children ............................................. 1-28
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 1-46
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ......................... 1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-49
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-38
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-107
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-105
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-103
Finish Care ............................................... 5-106
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-104
Interior ..................................................... 5-101
Leather .................................................... 5-103
Tires ........................................................ 5-107
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-108
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-105
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-104
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-106
Climate Control System
Climate Controls Personalization .................... 3-25
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-20
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-24
Rear .......................................................... 3-24
Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-60
Collision Damage Repair ................................... 7-9
Compass ....................................................... 2-33
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-16
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-36
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-23
Cooling System .............................................. 5-32
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-41
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-45
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab .................. 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-12
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-4
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-13
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-8
Diesel
Running Out of Fuel .................................... 2-32
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-71
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-18
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-17
Door
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-8
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks ............................................... 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-45
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-45
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-53
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-48
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-14
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-15
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-16
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14
Off-Road .................................................... 4-13
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-22
Winter ........................................................ 4-17
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-20
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-77
E
EDR ............................................................. 7-14
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-111
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-112
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-112
Headlamps ............................................... 5-111
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-112
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-119
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-111
4
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System ...................................................... 4-28
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-24
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-38
Coolant ...................................................... 5-28
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-23
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-36
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-31
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-37
Oil ............................................................. 5-18
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-22
Overheating ................................................ 5-30
Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-42
Starting ...................................................... 2-22
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-18
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-14
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-18
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-28
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-24
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-108
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-92
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-85
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-86
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-98
Fluid ............................................................. 5-25
Power Steering ........................................... 5-38
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-39
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-17
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-51
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Check Gas Cap Light ................................... 3-44
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-44
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-44
Running Out of ........................................... 2-32
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-112
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-112
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-119
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-111
5
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light .......................... 3-43
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-36
Fuel .......................................................... 3-44
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-40
Speedometer .............................................. 3-28
Tachometer ................................................. 3-28
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-33
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-40
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Gate Ajar Light ............................................... 3-43
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-44
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-52
Headlamps ............................................ 3-14, 5-53
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-15
Electrical System ....................................... 5-111
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Headlamps (cont.)
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-54
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-53
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-52
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Washer ...................................................... 3-11
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heater ........................................................... 3-20
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-42
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-68
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-16
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-15
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints ................................................... 1-32
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-67
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
6
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-17
Cluster ....................................................... 3-27
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-44
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-62
Lamps
Dome ........................................................ 3-17
Dome Lamp Override ................................... 3-18
Reading ..................................................... 3-18
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-23
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-39
License Plate Lamps ....................................... 5-56
Liftgate/Liftglass .............................................. 2-12
Liftglass/Liftgate .............................................. 2-12
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-30
Antilock Brake System Warning ..................... 3-35
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-34
Charging System ......................................... 3-33
Check Gages Warning ................................. 3-43
Check Gas Cap .......................................... 3-44
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-41
Gate Ajar ................................................... 3-43
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-42
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-44
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-38
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-31
Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-42
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-29
Security ..................................................... 3-41
Service All-Wheel-Drive ................................ 3-42
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator .................................... 3-36
StabiliTrak
®
Service ...................................... 3-36
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-37
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-18
Exit ........................................................... 3-18
Lights ............................................................ 3-14
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
7
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 4-5
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-22
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11
Locks
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-8
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-44
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-46
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-2
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-3
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-38
Manual, Using .................................................... iii
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ...................... 1-3
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-48
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
OnStar
®
and Compass .............................. 2-33
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-36
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-35
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-36
Outside Power Mirror ................................... 2-35
Moonroof ....................................................... 2-48
MP3 ............................................................. 3-71
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-15
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual ................................. 3-76
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-19
8
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-28
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-28
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-13
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-18
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-40
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-22
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-28
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-15
OnStar
®
System, see OnStar
®
Manual ............... 2-36
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-40
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-24
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-19
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-36
Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-35
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-36
Power Mirror ............................................... 2-35
Overhead Console .......................................... 2-45
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-108
Park Brake .................................................... 2-28
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-29
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-30
Parking
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-31
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-31
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-61
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
PASS-Key
®
III ................................................ 2-17
PASS-Key
®
III Operation .................................. 2-18
Perchlorate Materials Requirements,
California ..................................................... 5-3
Personalization, Climate Controls ...................... 3-25
Power
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Electrical System ....................................... 5-112
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-42
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-21
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-38
Windows .................................................... 2-14
9
Privacy .......................................................... 7-14
Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-14
Navigation System ....................................... 7-15
OnStar ....................................................... 7-15
Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-15
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-9
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-30
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),
Privacy ...................................................... 7-15
Radios .......................................................... 3-60
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-61
Radios
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual .............................. 3-76
Rear Seat Audio .......................................... 3-89
Reception ................................................... 3-91
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-60
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-90
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-18
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-50
Limited-Slip .................................................. 4-5
Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-24
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-11
Rear Floor Storage Lid .................................... 2-47
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................... 3-89
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-77
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-8
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-10
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with OnStar
®
and Compass .......................... 2-33
Reclining Seatbacks, Power ............................... 1-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-28
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-42
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ..................................................... 2-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-90
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-87
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-57
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-14
Replacement, Windshield ................................. 5-57
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-12
Saab ......................................................... 7-12
United States Government ............................ 7-12
10
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-68
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-69
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-21
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-4
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-22
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-15
Running Out of Fuel ........................................ 2-32
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-29
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 5-104
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-23
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-28
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-27
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-3
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ........................... 1-3
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-2
Power Reclining Seatbacks ............................. 1-5
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-8
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-94
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-48
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-46
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-49
Security Light ................................................. 3-41
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-4
All-Wheel-Drive Light .................................... 3-42
California Pershlorate Materials Requirements ..... 5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning ...................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-38
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-13
11
Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-7
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-66
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-108
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-29
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-30
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire .................................................... 5-101
Installing .................................................... 5-90
Removing ................................................... 5-87
Storing ....................................................... 5-98
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-122
Speedometer .................................................. 3-28
StabiliTrak
®
System .......................................... 4-5
StabiliTrak
®
Indicator Light ................................ 3-36
StabiliTrak
®
Service Light ................................. 3-36
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-22
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-91
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-45
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-45
Glove Box .................................................. 2-44
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-46
Overhead Console ....................................... 2-45
Rear Floor Storage Lid ................................. 2-47
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-21
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-28
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps ................................. 5-55
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-90
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-16
PASS-Key
®
III ............................................. 2-17
PASS-Key
®
III Operation .............................. 2-18
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-60
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-37
Tires ............................................................. 5-60
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ........................ 5-107
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-77
Chains ....................................................... 5-82
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-86
Cleaning ................................................... 5-107
Different Size .............................................. 5-79
High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-85
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-67
Inflator,- Accessory ....................................... 5-83
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-75
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-90
12
Tires (cont.)
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-71
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-70
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-90
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-87
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-94
Spare Tire ................................................ 5-101
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-98
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-62
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-79
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-81
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-81
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-76
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-28
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-30
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-28
Traction
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 4-5
StabiliTrak
®
System ....................................... 4-5
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-25
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-25
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-28
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-79
Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-40
Operation ................................................... 2-40
Using this Manual ............................................... iii
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-3
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-22
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-53
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-14
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-110
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-110
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-24
Visors ........................................................... 2-15
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-33
13
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-26
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-48
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washer, Headlamps ........................................ 3-11
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-81
Different Size .............................................. 5-79
Replacement ............................................... 5-81
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-38
Windows ....................................................... 2-13
Power ........................................................ 2-14
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ........ 5-106
Replacement ............................................... 5-57
Windshield (cont.)
Washer ...................................................... 3-10
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-39
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-57
Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-111
Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-10
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-17
X
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-74
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-92
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
14
1

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Saab 9-7X - 2008 wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info